Page 1 ZEQUO 6400 Operating Model Number: PN36240E Instructions  Thank you for purchasing our product.  This manual provides important information about safe and proper operations of this Switching Hub.  Please read "Important Safety Instructions" on pages 6 to 8 before use.
Page 2 The target model for this Operating Instruction is as follows. Model name Model number Firmware version PN36240E-ID PN36240E-TH ZEQUO 6400 1.0.1.34 PN36240E-MY PN36240E-SG...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents 1. Product Outline ..................... 11 2. Installation ......................18 3. Connection ......................19 4. Using Command Line Interface ................23 5. Basic Management Commands ................30 6. 802.1X Commands ....................54 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands ..............88 8.
Page 4 46. LLDP Commands ....................497 47. Loopback Interface Commands ................525 48. MAC Notification Commands ................529 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands .............. 534 50. MD5 Commands ....................556 51. Mirror Commands ....................560 52. MLD Proxy Commands ..................567 53.
Page 5 Important Safety Instructions This chapter contains important safety instructions for preventing bodily injury and/or property damage. You are required to follow them. ■Severity of bodily injury and/or property damage, which could result from incorrect use of the Switching Hub, are explained below. This symbol indicates a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death.
Page 6 ●Do not connect equipments other than 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/ 1000BASE-T to twisted pair port. Deviation could lead to fire, electric shock, and/or equipment failure. ●Do not place this Switching Hub in harsh environment such as near water, high humid, and/or high dust. Deviation could lead to fire, electric shock, and/or equipment failure.
Page 7 ●Use the bundled power cord (AC 100 - 240 V specifications). Deviation could lead to electric shock, malfunction, and/or equipment failure. ●Unplug the power cord in case of equipment failure. Deviation, such as keeping connected for a long time, could lead to fire.
Page 8: Basic Instructions For The Use Of This Product
●Please note that operation will not be guaranteed if any SD card other than the separately sold Panasonic SD card is installed into the SD card slot. Format the card with this Switching Hub.
Page 9 1. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage resulting from the operation not in accordance with this operation manual or loss of communications, which may or may not be caused by failure and/or malfunction of this product. 2. The contents described in this document may be changed without prior notice.
Page 10: Product Outline
 Ports 27 to 28 can also be used as stack ports. Up to four units of ZEQUO 6400 or ZEQUO6500 can be connected in a stack with SFP+ modules and optical fiber cables, or SFP+ direct attach cables. ...
Page 11 1. Product Outline  Policy-based routing is supported, allowing for routing according to the access condi- tions.  The Access Control function is supported, allowing to filter by IP address, MAC address, protocol number, and L4 port number.  VRRP is supported, allowing for layer-3 Switching Hub redundancy. ...
Page 12: Optional Accessories
1. Product Outline 1.2. Accessories Please be sure to confirm the contents. Please contact your distributor if any of the con- tents are insufficient.  ZEQUO 6400 main unit..............1  Installation Guide................1  CD-ROM (including this Operating Instructions)......1  Mounting brackets (for 19-inch rack mount).........2 ...
Page 13: Part Names And Functions
1. Product Outline 1.4. Part Names and Functions Fig. 1-1 Back, Front, LEDs ● Power port Connect the supplied power cord into the port and connect the other end into an elec- tric outlet. ● Power cord hook block Hooking the supplied power cord on the block makes the cord less likely to be unplugged from the power port.
Page 14 1. Product Outline ● SFP extension port (Ports 21 to 24) Install an SFP module. (These ports are exclusive usage with twisted pair ports.) When SFP extension slot is linked, the port is automatically switched to fiber port mode. SFP port supports only the full-duplex mode. ●...
Page 15: Led Behavior
1. Product Outline 1.5. LED Behavior 1.5.1. LED Behavior at Starting-up When you turn on this Switching Hub, all LEDs are lit momentarily. POWER LED lights green and STATUS LED lights orange, and then the hardware self diagnosis is executed. Upon finishing the diagnosis, both POWER and STATUS LEDs light green.
Page 16 1. Product Outline ● SFP extension slot LED (Ports 21 to 24) Behavior Description LINK/ACT. Green Light 1000Mbps link established in full-duplex. Green Blink Transmitting/receiving packets in 1000Mbps full-duplex. No device connected. ● SFP+ extension slot LED (Ports 25 to 28) Behavior Description LINK/ACT.
Page 17: Installation
2. Installation 2. Installation 2.1. Installing in a 19-inch Rack Take out two mount brackets and eight screws (for securing the mount brackets to the Switching Hub) from accessories, and secure a bracket to each of the right and left sides of the Switching Hub via four screw holes.
Page 18: Connection
3. Connection 3. Connection 3.1. Connecting a Copper Cable Port ● Connection Cable Use a CAT5e or higher compliant straight cable (copper cabling) with 8P8C RJ45 modular plugs. ● Network Configuration Fig. 3-1 Connection Configuration Example The length of the cable connecting this Switching Hub and a device must be 100 m or shorter.
Page 19 3. Connection 3.2. Connecting with an SFP Extension Slot Fig. 3-2 Optical Fiber Cable Connection Example Plugging an SFP module (optional) into an SFP extension slot enables an optical fiber con- nection. By factory default, the copper cable port is enabled, but the SFP extension port is automatically enabled when a link is established.
Page 20 3. Connection 3.3. Connecting with an SFP+ Extension Slot Fig. 3-3 Optical Fiber Cable Connection Example Plugging an SFP/SFP+ module (optional) into an SFP+ extension slot enables an optical fiber connection. Connect this Switching Hub's TX port to the RX port of the connected device and this Switching Hub's RX port to the TX port of the connected device.
Page 21: Connecting To Power
3. Connection 3.4. Connecting to Power Connect the supplied power cord to the power port of this Switching Hub, and connect the power plug into an electric outlet. The Switching Hub operates at AC 100 - 240 V (50/ 60 Hz). It does not have a power switch.
Page 22: Using Command Line Interface
4. Using Command Line Interface 4. Using Command Line Interface The Command Line Interface (CLI) is an operation screen to configure and manage this Switching Hub. You can use the CLI by connecting a VT-100 compatible terminal to the serial port of this Switching Hub or through a remote connection such as telnet.
Page 23 4. Using Command Line Interface There is no initial username or password. Just press the Enter key twice to display the CLI input cursor - Zxxx0:admin#. This is the command line where all commands are input. 4.2. Setting the Switch's IP Address Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP/IP application (for example BOOTP, TFTP).
Page 24 4. Using Command Line Interface In the above example, the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10.24.22.100 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0. The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully. The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet, SNMP MIB browser and the CLI or via the Web-based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch.
Page 25 4. Using Command Line Interface In the above example, the command config account was entered without the required parameter <username>, the CLI returned the Next possible completions: <username> prompt. The up arrow cursor control key was pressed to re-enter the previous command (config account) at the command prompt.
Page 26 4. Using Command Line Interface Zxxx0:admin#show Command: show Next possible completions: 802.1p 802.1x access_profile account accounting acct_client address_binding arpentry asymmetric_vlan attack_log auth_client auth_diagnostics auth_session_statistics auth_statistics authen authen_enable authen_login authen_policy authorization autoconfig bandwidth_control boot_file bpdu_protection broadcast_ping_reply command command_history community_encryption config current_config device_status dhcp dhcp_local_relay...
Page 27: Command Syntax Symbols
4. Using Command Line Interface In the above example, all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed. At the next command prompt, the up arrow was used to re-enter the show command, followed by the account parameter. The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch.
Page 28: Line Editing Keys
4. Using Command Line Interface 4.4. Line Editing Keys Keys Description Delete Delete character under cursor and shift remainder of line to left. Backspace Delete character to left of cursor and shift remainder of line to left. Ctrl+R Toggle on and off. When toggled on, inserts text and shifts previous text to right.
Page 29: Basic Management Commands
5. Basic Management Commands 5. Basic Management Commands This chapter describes the basic management commands for this Switching Hub.  Creating, editing, displaying, and deleting the accounts of users to manage this Switching Hub Up to eight user accounts can be created. ...
Page 30: Create Account
5. Basic Management Commands clear config terminal width [default | <value 80-200>] show terminal width show device_status 5.1. create account  Description This command creates user accounts. The username is between 1 and 15 characters, the password is between 0 and 15 characters. The number of accounts (including admin, operator, and user) is up to eight.
Page 31: Enable Password Encryption
5. Basic Management Commands  Example To create the Administrator-level user "panasonic": Zxxx0:admin#create account admin manager Command: create account admin manager Enter a case-sensitive new password:**** Enter the new password again for confirmation:**** Success. Zxxx0:admin# To create the Operator-level user "Sales":...
Page 32: Disable Password Encryption
5. Basic Management Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable password encryption: Zxxx0:admin#enable password encryption Command: enable password encryption Success. Zxxx0:admin# 5.3. disable password encryption  Description The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
Page 33: Config Account
5. Basic Management Commands  Example To disable password encryption: Zxxx0:admin#disable password encryption Command: disable password encryption Success. Zxxx0:admin# 5.4. config account  Description When the password information is not specified in the command, the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively. For this case, the user can only input the plain text password.
Page 34: Show Account
5. Basic Management Commands  Example To configure the user password of the "panasonic" account: Zxxx0:admin#config account manager Command: config account manager Enter a old password:**** Enter a case-sensitive new password:**** Enter the new password again for confirmation:**** Success. Zxxx0:admin# To configure the user password of the "administrator"...
Page 35: Delete Account
5. Basic Management Commands  Example To display accounts that have been created: Zxxx0:admin#show account Command: show account Current Accounts: Username Access Level --------------- ------------ System User Sales Operator manager Admin Zxxx0:admin# 5.6. delete account  Description This command is used to delete an existing account. ...
Page 36: Show Session
5. Basic Management Commands 5.7. show session  Description This command is used to display a list of current users which are logged in to CLI sessions.  Format show session  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 37 5. Basic Management Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display the Switching Hub information: Zxxx0:admin#show switch Command: show switch Device Type : Zxxx0 Gigabit Ethernet Switch MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00 IP Address : 10.90.90.90 (Manual) VLAN Name : default Subnet Mask : 255.0.0.0 Default Gateway...
Page 38: Show Environment
5. Basic Management Commands 5.9. show environment  Description This command is used to display the device's internal and external power and internal temperature status.  Format show environment  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the Switching Hub hardware status: Zxxx0:admin#show environment Command: show environment Internal Power...
Page 39: Config Temperature Threshold
5. Basic Management Commands  Parameters trap Specify to configure the warning temperature trap. Specify to configure the warning temperature log. state Enable or disable either the trap or log state for a warning temperature event. The default is enable. enable Enable either the trap or log state for a warning temperature event.
Page 40 5. Basic Management Commands  Parameters high Specify the high threshold value. The high threshold must bigger than the low threshold. <temperature -500-500> Specify the high threshold value. This value must be between -500 and 500. Specify the low threshold value. <temperature -500-500>...
Page 41 5. Basic Management Commands  Example To display the console port setting: Zxxx0:admin#show serial_port Command: show serial_port Baud Rate : 9600 Data Bits Parity Bits : None Stop Bits Auto-Logout : 10 mins Zxxx0:admin# 5.13. config serial_port  Description This command is used to configure the serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management host and the auto logout time for idle connections.
Page 42: Enable Clipaging
5. Basic Management Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the baud rate: Zxxx0:admin# config serial_port baud_rate 9600 Command: config serial_port baud_rate 9600 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 5.14. enable clipaging  Description This command is used to enable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page.
Page 43: Disable Clipaging
5. Basic Management Commands 5.15. disable clipaging  Description This command is used to disable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page. The default setting is enabled.  Format disable clipaging  Parameters None.
Page 44: Disable Telnet
5. Basic Management Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable Telnet and configure a port number: Zxxx0:admin#enable telnet 23 Command: enable telnet 23 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 5.17. disable telnet  Description This command is used to disable Telnet. ...
Page 45 5. Basic Management Commands  Format save {[config <pathname> | log | all]}  Parameters config (Optional) Specify to save configuration. <pathname> Specify the path name of the indicated configuration (Optional) Specify to save log. (Optional) Specify to save changes to currently active configuration and save logs. If no keyword is specified, all changes will be saved to bootup configuration file.
Page 46 5. Basic Management Commands To save all the configurations and logs to NV-RAM: Zxxx0:admin#save all Command: save all Saving configuration and logs to NV-RAM..Done. Zxxx0:admin# 5.19. reboot  Description This command is used to restart the Switching Hub.  Format reboot {force_agree} ...
Page 47 5. Basic Management Commands  Parameters config (Optional) Specify this keyword and all parameters are reset to default settings. However, the device will neither save nor reboot. system (Optional) Specify this keyword and all parameters are reset to default settings. Then the Switching Hub will do factory reset, save, and reboot.
Page 48 5. Basic Management Commands 5.21. login  Description This command is used to log in to the Switching Hub.  Format login  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To login to the Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#login Command: login UserName: 5.22.
Page 49 5. Basic Management Commands  Example To logout of the Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#logout Command: logout *********** * Logout * *********** Zxxx0 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware: Build 1.0.x.xx UserName: 5.23. clear  Description This command is used to clear the terminal screen. ...
Page 50: Config Terminal Width
5. Basic Management Commands 5.24. config terminal width  Description This command is used to configure the terminal width.  Format config terminal width [default | <value 80-200>]  Parameters default Specify the default terminal width value. <value 80-200> Specify a terminal width value between 80 and 200 characters. The default value is 80. ...
Page 51 5. Basic Management Commands  Example To display the configuration of the current terminal width: Zxxx0:admin#show terminal width Command: show terminal width Global terminal width : 80 Current terminal width : 80 Zxxx0:admin# 5.26. show device_status  Description This command displays current status of power(s) and fan(s) on the system. Within fan(s) status display, for example, there are three fans on the left of the Switching Hub, if three fans is working normally, there will display "OK"...
Page 52 5. Basic Management Commands  Example To show device status, the number 1, 2, 3 etc represent the fan number: Zxxx0:admin# show device_status Command: show device_status Unit 1: Internal Power: Active External Power: Fail Left Fan : 1, 3 Fail Right Fan : 2 Fail Back Fan...
Page 53: X Commands
6. 802.1X Commands 6. 802.1X Commands IEEE802.1X provides user authentication when clients access the network and blocks connections to the network from unregistered clients. It prevents the access by unauthorized users or devices to protect information assets security. Figure 6-1 IEEE 802.1X overview To use IEEE 802.1X authentication, there must be a client, authentication Switching Hub, and authentication server as shown above.
Page 54 6. 802.1X Commands You can register users in a local database in the authentication Switching Hub and use the database in place of a RADIUS server or as a RADIUS server failover.  Port-based authentication and MAC-based authentication You need to change the authentication method depending on how you connect the client to the port for the authentication Switching Hub.
Page 55: Guest Vlan
6. 802.1X Commands  Guest VLAN Combining the IEEE 802.1X and guest VLAN functions allows for restricted access, such as authorizing connection to the Internet only instead of completely blocking communications from unauthorized clients. Figure 6-3 Connection through guest VLAN Only one VLAN can be assigned to a guest VLAN.
Page 56 6. 802.1X Commands  Dynamic VLAN using IEEE 802.1X In a static VLAN, the destination VLAN is fixed for each port. Meanwhile, in a dynamic VLAN, the destination VLAN is determined based on the client MAC address information regardless of a port to be connected. There are several ways to configure dynamic VLAN.
Page 57 6. 802.1X Commands show 802.1x guest_vlan config radius add <server_index 1-3> [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] key <password 32> [default | {auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535> | timeout <sec 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}(1)] config radius delete <server_index 1-3> config radius <server_index 1-3> {ipaddress [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] | key <password 32> | auth_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535>...
Page 58 6. 802.1X Commands 6.2. disable 802.1x  Description This command is used to disable the 802.1X function.  Format disable 802.1x  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To disable the 802.1X function: Zxxx0:admin#disable 802.1x Command: disable 802.1x Success.
Page 59 6. 802.1X Commands  Example To create a user named "ctsnow": Zxxx0:admin#create 802.1x user ctsnow Command: create 802.1x user ctsnow Enter a case-sensitive new password: Enter the new password again for confirmation: Success. Zxxx0:admin# 6.4. delete 802.1x user  Description This command is used to delete a specified user.
Page 60 6. 802.1X Commands 6.5. show 802.1x user  Description This command is used to display 802.1X local user account information.  Format show 802.1x user  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display 802.1X user information: Zxxx0:admin#show 802.1x user Command: show 802.1x user Current Accounts: Username...
Page 61 6. 802.1X Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the 802.1X RADIUS EAP: Zxxx0:admin#config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap Command: config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap Success. Zxxx0:admin# 6.7. show 802.1x  Description This command is used to display the 802.1X state or configurations.
Page 62 6. 802.1X Commands Zxxx0:admin#show 802.1x Command: show 802.1x 802.1X : Disabled Authentication Protocol : RADIUS_EAP Forward EAPOL PDU : Disabled Max User : 448 RADIUS Authorization : Enabled Zxxx0:admin# To display the 802.1x state for ports 1 to 5: Zxxx0:admin# show 802.1x auth_state ports 1-4 Command: show 802.1x auth_state ports 1-4 Status: A - Authorized;...
Page 63 6. 802.1X Commands 6.8. config 802.1x capability ports  Description This command is used to configure port capability.  Format config 802.1x capability ports [<portlist> | all] [authenticator | none]  Parameters <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be configured. Specify to configure all ports.
Page 64 6. 802.1X Commands  Parameters <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be configured. Specify all ports. enable Enable the 802.1X PDU forwarding state. disable Disable the 802.1X PDU forwarding state.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 65 6. 802.1X Commands Zxxx0:admin#config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable Command: config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 6.11. config 802.1x auth_parameter ports  Description This command is used to configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port. ...
Page 66 6. 802.1X Commands quiet_period (Optional) The initialization value of the quietWhile timer. The default value is 60 s and can be any value from 0 to 65535. <sec 0-65535> The quiet period value must be between 0 an 65535 seconds. tx_period (Optional) The initialization value of the txWhen timer.
Page 67 6. 802.1X Commands Zxxx0:admin# config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1-20 direction both Command: config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1-20 direction both Success. Zxxx0:admin# 6.12. config 802.1x authorization attributes radius  Description This command is used to enable or disable the acceptation of an authorized configuration.
Page 68 6. 802.1X Commands 6.13. config 802.1x init  Description This command is used to initialize the authentication state machine of some or all.  Format config 802.1x init [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all] {mac_address <macaddr>}] ...
Page 69 6. 802.1X Commands 6.14. config 802.1x max_users  Description This command is used to configure the 802.1X maximum number of users of the system.  Format config 802.1x max_users [<value 1-448> | no_limit]  Parameters <value 1-448> Specify the maximum number of users. no_limit Specify an unlimited number of users.
Page 70 6. 802.1X Commands  Parameters port_based ports The Switching Hub passes data based on its authenticated port. <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be configured. Specify to configure all ports. mac_based ports The Switching Hub passes data based on the MAC address of authenticated RADIUS client.
Page 71 6. 802.1X Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To assign a static VLAN to be a guest VLAN: Zxxx0:admin# create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN Command: create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN Success. Zxxx0:admin# 6.17.
Page 72 6. 802.1X Commands 6.18. config 802.1x guest_vlan ports  Description This command is used to configure a guest VLAN setting.  Format config 802.1x guest_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]  Parameters <portlist>Specify a range of ports to be configured. Specify to configure all ports.
Page 73: Config Radius Add
6. 802.1X Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display guest VLAN information: Zxxx0:admin#show 802.1x guest_vlan Command: show 802.1x guest_vlan Guest Vlan Setting ----------------------------------------------------------- Guest vlan : guest Enable guest vlan ports : 1-10 Zxxx0:admin# 6.20. config radius add ...
Page 74: Config Radius Delete
6. 802.1X Commands auth_port Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS authentication data between the Switching Hub and the RADIUS server.The range is 1 to 65535. <udp_port_number 1-65535> The authentication port value must be between 1 and 65535. acct_port Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS accounting statistics between the Switching Hub and the RADIUS server.
Page 75: Config Radius
6. 802.1X Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete a RADIUS server: Zxxx0:admin#config radius delete 1 Command: config radius delete 1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 6.22. config radius  Description This command is used to configure a RADIUS server. ...
Page 76 6. 802.1X Commands auth_port Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS authentication data between the Switching Hub and the RADIUS server. The default is 1812. <udp_port_number 1-65535> The authentication port value must be between 1 and 65535. default Specify to use the default value.
Page 77: Show Radius
6. 802.1X Commands 6.23. show radius  Description This command is used to display RADIUS server configurations.  Format show radius  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display RADIUS server configurations: Zxxx0:admin#show radius Command: show radius Index 1 IP Address : 192.168.69.1 Auth-Port...
Page 78 6. 802.1X Commands 6.24. show auth_statistics  Description This command is used to display authenticator statistics information  Format show auth_statistics {ports <portlist>}  Parameters ports (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be displayed. ...
Page 79 6. 802.1X Commands 6.25. show auth_diagnostics  Description This command is used to display authenticator diagnostics information.  Format show auth_diagnostics {ports <portlist>}  Parameters ports (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be displayed. ...
Page 80 6. 802.1X Commands 6.26. show auth_session_statistics  Description This command is used to display authenticator session statistics information.  Format show auth_session_statistics {ports <portlist>}  Parameters ports (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be displayed. ...
Page 81 6. 802.1X Commands 6.27. show auth_client  Description This command is used to display authentication client information.  Format show auth_client  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display authentication client information:...
Page 82 6. 802.1X Commands Zxxx0:admin# show auth_client Command: show auth_client radiusAuthClient ==> radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAuthClientIdentifier Manager radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAuthServerIndex :1 radiusAuthServerAddress 0.0.0.0 radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime radiusAuthClientAccessRequests radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts radiusAuthClientAccessRejects radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses 0 radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators radiusAuthClientPendingRequests radiusAuthClientTimeouts radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped radiusAuthClient ==> radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAuthClientIdentifier MANAGER radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAuthServerIndex :2 radiusAuthServerAddress 0.0.0.0...
Page 83 6. 802.1X Commands radiusAuthClient ==> radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAuthClientIdentifier MANAGER radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAuthServerIndex :3 radiusAuthServerAddress 0.0.0.0 radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime radiusAuthClientAccessRequests radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts radiusAuthClientAccessRejects radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses 0 radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators radiusAuthClientPendingRequests radiusAuthClientTimeouts radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped Zxxx0:admin# 6.28. show acct_client  Description This command is used to display account client information ...
Page 84 6. 802.1X Commands Zxxx0:admin# show acct_client Command: show acct_client radiusAcctClient ==> radiusAcctClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAcctClientIdentifier MANAGER radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAccServerIndex : 1 radiusAccServerAddress 0.0.0.0 radiusAccClientServerPortNumber radiusAccClientRoundTripTime radiusAccClientRequests radiusAccClientRetransmissions radiusAccClientResponses radiusAccClientMalformedResponses radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators radiusAccClientPendingRequests radiusAccClientTimeouts radiusAccClientUnknownTypes radiusAccClientPacketsDropped radiusAcctClient ==> radiusAcctClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAcctClientIdentifier MANAGER radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAccServerIndex : 2 radiusAccServerAddress 0.0.0.0 radiusAccClientServerPortNumber...
Page 85: Config Accounting Service
6. 802.1X Commands radiusAuthServerEntry ==> radiusAccServerIndex : 3 radiusAccServerAddress 0.0.0.0 radiusAccClientServerPortNumber radiusAccClientRoundTripTime radiusAccClientRequests radiusAccClientRetransmissions radiusAccClientResponses radiusAccClientMalformedResponses radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators radiusAccClientPendingRequests radiusAccClientTimeouts radiusAccClientUnknownTypes radiusAccClientPacketsDropped Zxxx0:admin# 6.29. config accounting service  Description This command is used to configure the state of the specified RADIUS accounting service.
Page 86: Show Accounting Service
6. 802.1X Commands  Example To configure the state of the RADIUS accounting service shell to enable: Zxxx0:admin# config accounting service shell state enable Command: config accounting service shell state enable Success Zxxx0:admin# 6.30. show accounting service  Description This command is used to display RADIUS accounting service information. ...
Page 87: Access Control List (Acl) Commands
7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands For network security protection, blocking unauthorized access from internal and external sources is important. Access Control is a function to filter packet transfer by setting rules after checking the header information of packets that reach the Switching Hub.
Page 88 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Protocol type  TCP/UDP port number  IPv6 traffic class, flow label  Any packet contents (specified with the packet byte offset and mask, up to four contents) In addition, you can create rules that define packet detail information and filtering actions with IDs 1 to 256 for each profile.
Page 89 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands create access_profile profile_id <value 1-6> profile_name <name 1-32> [ethernet {vlan {<hex 0x0- 0x0fff>} | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type}(1) | ip {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code} | igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>...
Page 90: Flowlabel | Source_Ipv6_Mask | Destination_Ipv6_Mask
7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands show flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] {access_id <value 1- 256>}} 7.1. create access_profile profile_id  Description This command is used to create access list profiles.  Format create access_profile profile_id <value 1-6> profile_name <name 1-32> [ethernet {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff>...

Page 91 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands ethernet Specify an Ethernet access control list rule. vlan Specify a VLAN mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered. <hex 0x0-0x0fff> (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask. source_mac Specify the source MAC mask. <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff>...
Page 92 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands Specify an IP access control list rule. vlan Specify a VLAN mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered. <hex 0x0-0x0fff> - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask. source_ip_mask Specify an IP source submask. <netmask>...
Page 93 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands packet_content_mask A maximum of four offsets can be specified. Each offset defines one byte of data which is identified as a single UDF field. The offset reference is also configurable. It can be defined to start at the end of the tag, the end of the Ethernet type, or the end of the IP header.
Page 94 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands ipv6 Specify the IPv6 filtering mask. class Specify the IPv6 class mask. flowlabel Specify the IPv6 flow label mask. source_ipv6_mask Specify the IPv6 source IP mask. <ipv6mask> Specify the IPv6 source IP mask. destination_ipv6_mask Specify the IPv6 destination IP mask.
Page 95 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Example To create access list profiles: Zxxx0:admin#create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name 1 ethernet vlan source_mac FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF destination_mac 00-00-00-FF-FF-FF 802.1p ethernet_type Command: create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name 1 ethernet vlan source_mac FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF destination_mac 00-00-00-FF-FF-FF 802.1p ethernet_type Success.
Page 96: Config Access_Profile [Profile_Id | Profile_Name ] [Add
7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Example To delete access list profiles: Zxxx0:admin#delete access_profile profile_id 1 Command: delete access_profile profile_id 1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 7.3. config access_profile  Description This command is used to configure access list entries.  Format config access_profile [profile_id <value 1-6>...
Page 97 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Parameters profile_id Specify the index of the access list profile. <value 1-6> Specify the value between 1 and 6. profile_name Specify the profile name. <name 1-32> Specify the profile name. The maximum length is 32 characters. add access_id Specify the index of the access list entry.
Page 98 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands Specify an IP access control list rule. vlan Specify the VLAN name. <vlan_name 32> Specify the VLAN name. The maximum length is 32 characters. vlanid Specify the VLAN ID. <vlanid 1-4094> Specify the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094. mask (Optional) Specify the mask.
Page 99 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands src_port (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP source ports. <value 0-65535> Specify the value between 0 and 65535. mask (Optional) Specify the mask. <hex 0x0-0xffff> Specify the mask. dst_port (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP destination ports.
Page 100 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands packet_content Specify the packet content for the user defined mask. offset_chunk_1 Specifies the contents of the offset trunk 1 to be monitored. <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> Enter the contents of the offset trunk 1 to be monitored here. mask Specifies an additional mask for each field.
Page 101 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands Specify TCP. src_port (Optional) Specify the TCP source port range. <value 0-65535> Specify the value between 0 and 65535. mask (Optional) Specify the mask. <hex 0x0-0xffff> Specify the mask. dst_port (Optional) Specify the TCP destination port range. <value 0-65535>...
Page 102 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands vlan_based Specify the VLAN-based ACL rule. There are two conditions: this rule will apply to all ports and packets must belong to the configured VLAN. It can be specified by VLAN name or VLAN ID. vlan Specify the VLAN name.
Page 103: Show Access_Profile {[Profile_Id | Profile_Name ]
7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure an access list entry: Zxxx0:admin#config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip 20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp port 1 permit Command: config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip 20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp port 1 permit Success.
Page 104 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Example To display the current access list table: Zxxx0:admin#show access_profile Command: show access_profile Access Profile Table Total User Set Rule Entries : 3 Total Used HW Entries : 19 Total Available HW Entries : 1005 ================================================================================ Profile ID: 1...
Page 105 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands Profile ID: 2 Profile Name: IMPBv4 Mask Source MAC : FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Source IP : 255.255.255.255 Consumed HW Entries: 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Rule ID : 1 Ports: 1 Match on Source MAC : 00-05-04-03-02-01 Mask : FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Source Ip : 10.10.10.1 Mask : 255.255.255.255 Action:...
Page 106 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands To display an access profile that supports an entry mask for each rule: Zxxx0:admin#show access_profile profile_id 2 Command: show access_profile profile_id 2 Access Profile Table Profile ID: 2 Profile Name: 2 Type: Ethernet Mask on VLAN : 0xF Source MAC...
Page 107: Config Time_Range
7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands 7.5. config time_range  Description This command is used to define a specific range of time to activate a function on the Switch by specifying which time range in a day and which days in a week are covered in the time range.

Page 108: Show Time_Range
7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Example To configure the range of time to activate a function on the Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#config time_range testdaily hours start_time 12:0:0 end_time 13:0:0 weekdays mon,fri Command: config time_range testdaily hours start_time 12:0:0 end_time 13:0:0 weekdays mon,fri Success.
Page 109 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands 7.7. show current_config access_profile  Description This command is used to display the ACL part of the current configuration, when logged in with user level privileges. The overall current configuration can be displayed by using the show config command, which is accessible with administrator level privileges.
Page 110: [Rate [] {Burst_Size []} Rate_Exceed
7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands 7.8. config flow_meter  Description This command is used to configure the flow-based metering function. The metering function supports three modes: single rate two color, single rate three color, and two rate three color. The access rule must be created before the parameters of this function can be applied.
Page 111 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands  Parameters profile_id Specify the index of the access list profile. <value 1-6> Specify the value between 1 and 6. profile_name Specify the name of the profile. <name 1-32> Specify the name of the profile. The maximum length is 32 characters. access_id Specify the index of the access list entry.
Page 112 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands conform (Optional) This field denotes the green packet flow. Green packet flows may have their DSCP field rewritten to a value stated in this field. Users may also choose to count green packets by using counter parameter. permit Enter this parameter to allow packet flows that are in the green flow.
Page 113 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands sr_tcm Specify the "single-rate three-color mode". Specify the Committed Information Rate. The unit is in Kbps. <value 0-1048576> Specify the value between 0 and 1048576. Specify the Committed Burst Size. The unit is in Kbyte. <value 0-131072>...
Page 114 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands violate This field denotes the red packet flow. Red packet flows may have excess packets permitted through or dropped. Users may replace the DSCP field of these packets by checking its radio button and entering a new DSCP value in the allotted field. permit Enter this parameter to allow packet flows that are in the red flow.
Page 115 7. Access Control List (ACL) Commands 7.9. show flow_meter  Description This command is used to display the flow meter table.  Format show flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] {access_id <value 1-256>}}  Parameters profile_id(Optional) Specify the profile ID. <value 1-6>...
Page 116: Access Control List (Acl) Egress Command List
8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List While "Access Control List (ACL) Commands" filter packets reaching the Switching Hub, these commands filter packets output from the Switching Hub. For overview on filtering, refer to "Access Control List (ACL) Commands."...
Page 117: 0-1048576> {Pbs } {[Color_Blind | Color_Aware]} {Conform [Permit
8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List config egress_flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] access_id <value 1- 128> [rate <value 0-1048576> {burst_size <value 0-131072>} rate_exceed [drop_packet | remark_dscp <value 0-63>] | tr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> {cbs <value 0-131072>} pir <value 0-1048576>...
Page 118 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List  Parameters profile_id Specifies the index of the egress access list profile. The lower the profile ID, the higher the priority. <value 1-4> Enter the profile ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4. profile_name The name of the profile must be specified.
Page 119 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List Specifies this is an IPv4 mask. vlan (Optional) Specifies a VLAN mask. <hex 0x0-0x0fff> Enter the VLAN mask used here. source_ip_mask (Optional) Specifies a source IP address mask. <netmask> Enter the source network mask used here. destination_ip_mask (Optional) Enter the source network mask used here.
Page 120 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List ipv6 (Optional) Specifies this is an IPv6 mask. class (Optional) Specifies the IPv6 class. source_ipv6_mask (Optional) Specifies an IPv6 source sub-mask. <ipv6mask> Enter the IPv6 source sub-mask value here. destination_ipv6_mask Specifies an IPv6 destination sub-mask. <ipv6mask>...
Page 121 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8.2. delete egress_access_profile  Description Delete egress access profile command can only delete the profile which is created by egress ACL module.  Format delete egress_access_profile [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32> | all] ...
Page 122 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8.3. config egress_access_profile  Description This command is used to configure egress access list entries.  Format config egress_access_profile [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] [add access_id [auto_assign | <value 1-128>] [ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macaddr>...
Page 123 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List ethernet Specifies an Ethernet egress ACL rule. vlan (Optional) Specifies the VLAN name. <vlan_name 32> Enter the VLAN name used for this configuration here. This name can be up to 32 characters long. vlanidSpecifies a VLAN ID.
Page 124 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List mask (Optional) Specifies the mask used. <hex 0x0-x0fff> Enter the mask value used here. source_ip (Optional) Specifies an IP source address. <ipaddr> Enter the source IP address used here. mask Specifies the source IP address used here. <netmask>...
Page 125 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List flag (Optional) Specifies the TCP flag fields. Specifies that the TCP flag field will be set to 'all'. Specifies that the TCP flag field will be set to 'urg'. Specifies that the TCP flag field will be set to 'ack'. Specifies that the TCP flag field will be set to 'psh'.
Page 126 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List ipv6 Specifies the rule applies to IPv6 fields. class (Optional) Specifies the value of IPv6 class. <value 0-255> Enter the IPv6 class value here. This value must be between 0 and 255. source_ipv6 (Optional) Specifies the value of IPv6 source address.
Page 127 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List type Specifies that the rule will apply to the ICMP type traffic value. <value 0-255> Enter the ICMP traffic type value here. This value must be between 0 and 255. code Specifies that the rule will apply to the ICMP code traffic value. <value 0-255>...
Page 128 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List time_range (Optional) Specifies the name of the time range entry. <range_name 32> Enter the time range value here. This name can be up to 32 characters long. delete Specifies to delete a profile or rule. access_id Specifies the index of the access list entry.
Page 129 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8.4. show egress_access_profile  Description This command is used to display current egress access list table.  Format show egress_access_profile {[profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>]}  Parameters profile_id (Optional) Specifies the index of the egress access list profile. <value 1-4>...
Page 130 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List Zxxx0:admin# show egress_access_profile Command: show access_profile Egress Access Profile Table Total User Set Rule Entries Total Used Hardware Entries Total Available Hardware Entries : 253 ================================================================================ Profile ID: 1 Profile name: 1 Type: Ethernet Mask on Source MAC...
Page 131 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List Rule ID : 1 (auto assign) Port group: 1 Match on Source IP : 10.0.0.2 Destination IP : 10.90.90.90 DSCP : 25 Action: Permit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Rule ID : 2 (auto assign) Port group: 1 Match on Source IP : 10.0.0.1...
Page 132 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8.5. show current_config egress_access_profile  Description This command is used to display the egress ACL part of current configuration in user level of privilege. The overall current configuration can be displayed by "show config" command which is accessible in administrator level of privilege.
Page 133 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8.6. config egress_flow_meter  Description This command is used to configure the packet flow-based metering based on an egress access profile and rule.  Format config egress_flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] access_id <value 1-128>...
Page 134 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List rate_exceed This specifies the action for packets that exceed the committed rate in single rate "two color" mode. The action can be specified as one of the following: drop_packet Drop the packet immediately. remark_dscp Mark the packet with a specified DSCP.
Page 135 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List exceed Specify the action when packet is in "yellow color". permit (Optional) Permit the packet. replace_dscp Changes the DSCP of the packet. <value 0-63> Enter the DSCP replace value here. This value must be between 0 and 63. drop Drops the packet.
Page 136 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List conform (Optional) Specify the action when packet is in "green color". permit (Optional) Permit the packet. replace_dscp Changes the DSCP of the packet. <value 0-63> Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63. counter (Optional) Specifies the ACL counter.
Page 137 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List  Example To configure a "two rates three color" flow meter: Zxxx0:admin# config egress_flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 200 pir 2000 pbs 200 exceed replace_dscp 21 violate drop command: config egress_flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 200 pir 2000 pbs 200 exceed replace_dscp 21 violate drop Success.
Page 138 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List Zxxx0:admin# show egress_flow_meter Command: show egress_flow_meter Flow Meter Information: ------------------------ Profile ID : 1 Access ID : 1 Mode : trTcm / color-blind CIR:1000(Kbps) CBS:2000(Kbyte) PIR:2000(Kbps) PBS:2000(Kbyte) Actions: Conform : Permit Replace DSCP : 11 Counter : enable Exceed : Permit...
Page 139 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List Zxxx0:admin# create port_group id 2 name group2 Command: create port_group id 2 name group2 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 8.9. config port_group  Description This command is used to add or delete a port list to a port group. ...
Page 140 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8.10. delete port_group  Description This command is used to delete port group.  Format delete port_group [id <value 1-64> | name <name 16>]  Parameters Specifies the port group ID. <value 1-64> Enter the port group ID used here.
Page 141 8. Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List 8.11. show port_group  Description This command is used to display the port group information.  Format show port_group {id <value 1-64> | name <name 16>}  Parameters (Optional) Specifies the port group ID. <value 1-64>...
Page 142: Arp Commands
9. ARP Commands 9. ARP Commands ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is a protocol to calculate a MAC address from an IP address. The Switching Hub sends an ARP request to devices on the same network and manages a mapping between IP addresses and MAC addresses in table data called an ARP table based on responses from the devices.
Page 143: Delete Arpentry
9. ARP Commands <macaddr> The MAC address corresponding to the IP address above.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To create a static ARP entry for the IP address 10.48.74.121 and MAC address 00:50:BA:00:07:36: Zxxx0:admin#create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36 Command: create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36...
Page 144: Config Arpentry
9. ARP Commands 9.3. config arpentry  Description This command is used to configure a static entry in the ARP table. Specify the IP address and MAC address of the entry.  Format config arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>  Parameters <ipaddr>The IP address of the end node or station. <macaddr>...
Page 145 9. ARP Commands  Parameters state Enable or disable the ARP refresh. The default is enable. enable Enable the ARP refresh. disable Disable the ARP refresh.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To disable the ARP refresh state: Zxxx0:admin#config arp refresh time_out state disable Command: config arp refresh time_out state disable...
Page 146: Show Arpentry
9. ARP Commands  Example To configure the ARP aging time: Zxxx0:admin#config arp_aging time 30 Command: config arp_aging time 30 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 9.6. show arpentry  Description This command is used to display the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table. Filter the display by IP address, interface name, or static entries.
Page 147: Clear Arptable
9. ARP Commands  Example To display the ARP table: Zxxx0:admin# show arpentry Command: show arpentry ARP Aging Time : 20 Interface IP Address MAC Address Type ------------- --------------- ----------------- --------------- System 10.0.0.0 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast System 10.90.90.90 00-01-02-03-04-00 Local System 10.255.255.255 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast...
Page 148: Show Ipfdb
9. ARP Commands 9.8. show ipfdb  Description This command is used to display the IP address forwarding table on the Switch.  Format show ipfdb {[ip_address <ipaddr> | interface <ipif_name 12> | port <port>]}  Parameters ip_address (Optional) Specifies the IP address of the forwarding table. <ipaddr>...
Page 149: Asymmetric Vlan Commands
10. Asymmetric VLAN Commands 10.Asymmetric VLAN Commands Asymmetric VLAN is one of functions used to access shared resources, such as the Internet or corporate server, from multiple VLANs while blocking communications between VLANs. It assigns a specific port to multiple VLANs. This is used when tagged VLANs are not available. 　　　　　　Port 1: Assigned to VLAN2, VLAN3 Port 3: Assigned to VLAN2 Port 9, 17: Assigned to VLAN3...
Page 150 10. Asymmetric VLAN Commands 10.1. enable asymmetric_vlan  Description This command is used to enable the asymmetric VLAN function..  Format enable asymmetric_vlan  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable asymmetric VLAN setting: Zxxx0:admin# enable asymmetric_vlan Command: enable asymmetric_vlan...
Page 151 10. Asymmetric VLAN Commands  Example To disable asymmetric VLAN setting: Zxxx0:admin# disable asymmetric_vlan Command: disable asymmetric_vlan Success. Zxxx0:admin# 10.3. show asymmetric_vlan  Description This command is used to display the asymmetric VLAN function.  Format show asymmetric_vlan  Parameters None.
Page 152: Auto Configuration Commands
11. Auto Configuration Commands 11.Auto Configuration Commands When the Auto Configuration function is enabled, the Switching Hub loads the configuration file from a previously installed TFTP server during a boot via BOOTP parameters. show autoconfig enable autoconfig disable autoconfig 11.1. show autoconfig ...
Page 153: Enable Autoconfig
11. Auto Configuration Commands 11.2. enable autoconfig  Description This command is used to enable automatically to get configuration from a TFTP server according to the options in the DHCP reply packet. To employ this method, the DHCP server must be set up to deliver the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name information first.
Page 154 11. Auto Configuration Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To disable the DHCP auto configuration status: Zxxx0:admin#disable autoconfig Command: disable autoconfig Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 155: Basic Ip Commands
12. Basic IP Commands 12.Basic IP Commands In this chapter, you will configure the following basic IP network settings for each interface.  IP address (IPv4, IPv6), net mask, enable/disable  Proxy ARP, which responds to an ARP request to other devices ...
Page 156: Config Ipif
12. Basic IP Commands 12.1. config ipif  Description Configure the parameters for an L3 interface. For IPv4, only the system interface can be specified for the way to get the IP address. If the mode is set to BOOTP or DHCP, then the IPv4 address will be obtained through the operation of protocols.
Page 157 12. Basic IP Commands local (Optional) This setting controls whether the system provides the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP addresses located in the same interface as the received interface. When proxy ARP is enabled for an interface, the system will do the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP addresses located on a different interface.
Page 158 12. Basic IP Commands Zxxx0:admin#config ipif System vlan v1 Command: config ipif System vlan v1 Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 159: Create Ipif
12. Basic IP Commands 12.2. create ipif  Description This command is used to create an L3 interface. This interface can be configured with IPv4 or IPv6 addresses. Currently, it has a restriction: an interface can have only one IPv4 address defined. But it can have multiple IPv6 addresses defined. Thus, the multinetting configuration of IPv4 must be done through creation of a secondary interface on the same VLAN, instead of directly configuring multiple IPv4 addresses on the same interface.
Page 160 12. Basic IP Commands...
Page 161: Delete Ipif
12. Basic IP Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To create an IP interface petrovic1: Zxxx0:admin#create ipif petrovic1 100.1.1.2/16 VLAN598 Command: create ipif petrovic1 100.1.1.2/16 VLAN598 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 12.3. delete ipif ...
Page 162: Enable Ipif
12. Basic IP Commands 12.4. enable ipif  Description This command is used to enable the state for an IPIF. When the state is enabled, the IPv4 processing will be started when an IPv4 address is configured on the IPIF. The IPv6 processing will be started when an IPv6 address is explicitly configured on the IPIF.
Page 163: Show Ipif
12. Basic IP Commands All of the IP interfaces.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To disable the state for an interface: Zxxx0:admin#disable ipif petrovic1 Command: disable ipif petrovic1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 12.6.
Page 164 12. Basic IP Commands Zxxx0:admin#show ipif Command: show ipif IP Interface : System VLAN Name : default Interface Admin State : Enabled IPv4 Address : 10.90.90.90/8 (Manual) Primary Proxy ARP : Disabled (Local : Disabled) IP Directed Broadcast : Disabled IPv4 State : Enabled IPv6 State...
Page 165 12. Basic IP Commands  Example To enable the automatic configuration of link local address for an interface: Zxxx0:admin#enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto interface1 Command: enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto interface1 Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 166 12. Basic IP Commands 12.8. disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto  Description This command is used to disable the auto configuration of link local address when no IPv6 address is explicitly configured.  Format disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]  Parameters <ipif_name 12> The name of the interface.
Page 167 12. Basic IP Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To display the link local address automatic configuration state: Zxxx0:admin#show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto Command: show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto IPIF: System Automatic Link Local Address: Disabled Zxxx0:admin# 12.10.
Page 168 12. Basic IP Commands 12.11. disable ip_setup_interface  Description This command is used to disable the IP setup interface.  Format disable ip_setup_interface  Parameters None  Restrictions disable ip_setup_interface Only Administraor and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 169 12. Basic IP Commands  Example To display the IP setup interface status: Zxxx0:admin#show ip_setup_interface Command: show ip_setup_interface IP Setup Interface: Enabled Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 170: Bootup Function Commands
13. Bootup Function Commands 13.Bootup Function Commands show boot_file config boot_up command 13.1. show boot_file  Description Use this command to show the boot file. 1. 1 Bootup Firmware/Configuration cannot be changed forever. 2. The 2 Bootup Firmware can be set by command "config firmware image <pathname>...
Page 171 13. Bootup Function Commands  Example To show boot_file Zxxx0:admin#show boot_file Command: show boot_file *1st Bootup Firmware : /d:/sd_runtime.rom *1st Bootup Configuration : /d:/sd_config.cfg *Can not change 1st Bootup File 2nd Bootup Firmware : /c:/runtime.rom 2nd Bootup Configuration : /c:/config.cfg Actual Bootup Firmware : /c:/runtime.rom Actual Bootup Configuration...
Page 172 13. Bootup Function Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example None.
Page 173: Bpdu Attack Protection Commands
14. BPDU Attack Protection Commands 14.BPDU Attack Protection Commands BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) is a spanning tree protocol and a packet to detect loops. In general, it is not received by any other than specific ports. If BPDU packets were received by an unexpected port, a loop failure may have occurred or an unauthorized Switching Hub may have been added, resulting in the path change.
Page 174 14. BPDU Attack Protection Commands 14.1. config bpdu_protection ports  Description This command is used to configure port state and mode for BPDU protection.  Format config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode [drop | block | shutdown]} (1) ...
Page 175 14. BPDU Attack Protection Commands 14.2. config bpdu_protection recovery_timer  Description When a port enters the under attack state, it can be disabled or blocked based on the configuration. The state can be recovered manually or by the auto recovery mechanism.
Page 176 14. BPDU Attack Protection Commands 14.3. config bpdu_protection  Description This command is used to configure the BPDU protection trap state or log state.  Format config bpdu_protection [trap | log] [none | attack_detected | attack_cleared | both]  Parameters trap Specify the trap state.
Page 177 14. BPDU Attack Protection Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable BPDU protection for the entire Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#enable bpdu_protection Command: enable bpdu_protection Success. Zxxx0:admin# 14.5. disable bpdu_protection  Description This command is used to disable BPDU protection globally for the entire Switching Hub.
Page 178 14. BPDU Attack Protection Commands 14.6. show bpdu_protection  Description This command is used to display BPDU protection global configuration or per port configuration and current status.  Format show bpdu_protection {ports {<portlist>}}  Parameters ports (Optional) Specify all ports to be displayed. <portlist>...
Page 179: Cable Diagnostics Commands
15. Cable Diagnostics Commands 15.Cable Diagnostics Commands The commands are used to diagnose the link status, failure status, and possible failure position of copper cabling connected to ports of this Switching Hub. After diagnosing open, short, and crosstalk of the cable, the cable length can be measured if there is no open or short.
Page 180 15. Cable Diagnostics Commands For Gigabit Ethernet ports: • Where the link partner is powered on with no errors and the link is up, this command cannot detect the cable length. • Where the link partner is powered on with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open, short, or crosstalk.
Page 181 15. Cable Diagnostics Commands Zxxx0:admin# cable_diag ports 1:1-1:10,1:21 Command: cable_diag ports 1:1-1:10,1:21 Perform Cable Diagnostics ... Port Type Link Status Test Result Cable Length (M) ------ ---------- ------------- ---------------------------- ------------ 1000BASE-T Link Up 1000BASE-T Link Up 1000BASE-T Link Down Shutdown 1000BASE-T Link Down Shutdown...
Page 182: Command List History Commands
16. Command List History Commands 16.Command List History Commands The "?" command is used to display available commands and options in this Switching Hub. Previously entered commands are stored in the command history and can be recalled with the up-arrow key for entry. The default number of commands stored in the history is 25.
Page 183 16. Command List History Commands Zxxx0:admin#? Command: ? cable_diag ports clear clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear counters clear dhcp binding clear dhcp conflict_ip clear fdb clear historical_counters ports clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group clear igmp_snooping statistic counter clear log clear mac_based_access_control auth_state CTRL+C ESC q...
Page 184 16. Command List History Commands  Example To display the command history: Zxxx0:admin# show command_history Command: show command_history show traffic_segmentation 1-6 config traffic_segmentation 1-6 forward_list 7-8 config radius delete 1 config radius add 1 10.48.74.121 key manager default config 802.1x reauth port_based ports all config 802.1x init port_based ports all config 802.1x auth_mode port_based config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1-50 direction both...
Page 185 16. Command List History Commands To configure the number of commands the Switching Hub can record to the last 20 commands: Zxxx0:admin#config command_history 20 Command: config command_history 20 Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 186: Command Logging Command List
17. Command Logging Command List 17.Command Logging Command List The commands are used to log the execution history of commands that change this Switching Hub's settings. The history of commands that do not affect the setting changes (e.g. show) is not stored. enable command logging disable command logging show command logging...
Page 187: Disable Command Logging
17. Command Logging Command List Zxxx0:admin# enable command logging Command: enable command logging Success. Zxxx0:admin# 17.2. disable command logging  Description The disable command logging command is used to disable the command logging function.  Format disable command logging  Parameters None.
Page 188 17. Command Logging Command List  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To show the command logging configuration status: Zxxx0:admin# show command logging Command: show command logging Command Logging State : Disabled Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 189 17. Command Logging Command List...
Page 190: Network Access Authentication Command List
18. Network Access Authentication Command List 18.Network Access Authentication Command List The commands are used to configure the authentication server settings for network access authentication. config authentication ports [<portlist> | all] {auth_mode [port_based | host_based {vlanid <vidlist> state [enable | disable}(1) config authentication mac_format {case [lowercase | uppercase] | delimiter {[hyphen | colon | dot | none] | number [1 | 2 | 5]}(1)}(1) show authentication ports {<portlist>}...
Page 191 18. Network Access Authentication Command List  Parameters <portlist>Enter the list of ports to be configured here. Specify all ports on the Switch. auth_mode (Optional) Specify the authentication mode used. port_based If one of the attached hosts passes the authentication, all hosts on the same port will be granted to access network.
Page 192 18. Network Access Authentication Command List 18.2. config authentication mac_format  Description This command is used to configure the MAC address format of the RADIUS authentication user name for MAC-based Access Control.  Format config authentication mac_format {case [lowercase | uppercase] | delimiter {[hyphen | colon | dot | none] | number [1 | 2 | 5]}(1)}(1) ...
Page 193: Show Authentication Ports
18. Network Access Authentication Command List 18.3. show authentication ports  Description This command is used to display authentication setting on port(s).  Format show authentication ports {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>Enter a list of ports to be displayed.  Restrictions None.
Page 194: Enable Authorization Attributes
18. Network Access Authentication Command List  Example This example displays authentication setting for all ports: Zxxx0:admin# show authentication ports Command: show authentication ports Port Auth Mode Authentication VLAN(s) ---- ----------- ---------------------- Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based Host-based...
Page 195: Disable Authorization Attributes
18. Network Access Authentication Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example This example sets authorization global state enabled: Zxxx0:admin# enable authorization attributes Command: enable authorization attributes Success. Zxxx0:admin# 18.5. disable authorization attributes ...
Page 196: Show Authorization
18. Network Access Authentication Command List 18.6. show authorization  Description This command is used to display authorization status.  Format show authorization  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example This example displays authorization status: Zxxx0:admin# show authorization Command: show authorization Authorization for Attributes: Disabled Zxxx0:admin# 18.7.
Page 197: Show Authentication
18. Network Access Authentication Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example Set authentication server auth fail over state: Zxxx0:admin# config authentication server failover local Command: config authentication server failover local Success.
Page 198 18. Network Access Authentication Command List 18.9. show authentication mac_format  Description This command is used to display the authentication MAC format settings.  Format show authentication mac_format  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the authentication MAC format settings: Zxxx0:admin# show authentication mac_format Command: show authentication mac_format Case...
Page 199: Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (Ddm) Commands
19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands config ddm ports [ <portlist> | all ] [[temperature_threshold{ high_alarm <degrees> | low_alarm <degrees> | high_warning <degrees> | low_warning <degrees>}|voltage_threshold{ high_alarm <voltage> | low_alarm <voltage> | high_warning <voltage> | low_warning<voltage>} | bias_current_threshold { high_alarm <milliampere>...
Page 200 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands high_alarm <degrees> Specifies the high threshold value for the temperature alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken. The range of this parameter is from -128 to 127.996 degrees Celsius.
Page 201 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.2. config ddm ports voltage_threshold  Description The command configures the voltage thresholds of the specified ports. The precision of the effective threshold is dependent on the hardware.  Format config ddm ports [<portlist> | all] voltage_threshold { high_alarm < voltage > | low_alarm <...
Page 202 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands The parameter type voltage allows the user to input the decimal in the CLI command. The CLI does not restrict the number of input digits, the only limitation of the inputted digits are the size of the command buffer and the float-point precision.
Page 203 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.3. config ddm ports bias_current_threshold  Description This command is used to configure the thresholds of bias current of the specified ports. The command configures the bias current thresholds of the specified ports. The precision of the effective threshold is dependent on the hardware.
Page 204 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands The parameter type milliampere allows the user to input the decimal in the CLI command. The CLI does not restrict the number of input digits, the only limitation of the inputted digits are the size of the command buffer and the float-point precision.
Page 205 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands high_alarm <mw_or_dbm> Specifies the high threshold for the transmit power alarm. When the operating parameter rises above this value, the action associated with alarm is taken. If the unit is mW, the range of this parameter is from 0 to 6.5535mW. If the unit is dBm, the range of this parameter is form -40 to 8.1647dBm.
Page 206 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands Zxxx0:admin# config ddm ports 21 tx_power_threshold high_alarm 0.625 low_alarm 0.006 high_warning 0.55 low_warning 0.008 Command: config ddm ports 21 tx_power_threshold high_alarm 0.625 low_alarm 0.006 high_warning 0.55 low_warning 0.008 Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 207 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.5. config ddm ports rx_power_threshold  Description This command is used to configure the thresholds of the output power of the specified ports. The command configures the bias current thresholds of the specified ports. The precision of the effective threshold is dependent on the hardware.
Page 208 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands low_warning <mw_or_dbm> Specifies the low threshold for the transmit power warning. When the operating parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken. If the unit is mW, the range of this parameter is from 0 to 6.5535mW. If the unit is dBm, the range of this parameter is form -40 to 8.1647dBm.
Page 209 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.6. config ddm ports reload threshold  Description This command is used to reload the DDM threshold configuration. The command reloads default threshold configuration of special ports. If the ports are link up with optic modules, all thresholds of those ports will be set to hardware default.
Page 210 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.7. config ddm ports state  Description This command is used to configure the DDM state and/or the DDM shutdown action when it encounters an exceeding alarm or warning threshold event. The command configures the DDM state and/or the DDM shutdown action when it encounters an exceeding alarm or warning threshold event.
Page 211 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands Zxxx0:admin# config ddm ports 11 state enable shutdown alarm Command: config ddm ports 11 state enable shutdown alarm Success. Zxxx0:admin# 19.8. config ddm log  Description Enable or disable the log when parameters of the optic module exceed its DDM threshold. The command configures the DDM log action when encountering an exceeding alarm or warning thresholds event.
Page 212 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.9. config ddm trap  Description This command is used to enable or disable the trap when parameters of the optic module exceed its DDM threshold. The command configures the DDM trap action when encountering an exceeding alarm or warning thresholds event.
Page 213 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.10. config ddm power_unit  Description This command is used to configure the unit of DDM TX/RX power. The command configures the global unit of DDM TX/RX power.  Format config ddm power_unit [mw | dbm] ...
Page 214 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.11. show ddm ports status  Description This command is used to show the current operating DDM parameters values of the optic module of the specified ports. This command displays the current operating parameters of the optic modules.
Page 215 19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.12. show ddm ports configuration  Description This command is used to display the current configurations of the optic modules. There are two types of thresholds: the administrative configuration and the operation configuration threshold. For the optic port, when a particular threshold was configured by the user, it will be shown in this command with a tag indicating that it is a threshold that the user configured, else it would be the threshold read from the optic module that is being inserted.
Page 216: Show Ddm
19. Didital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Commands 19.13. show ddm  Description This command is used to display the DDM global settings.  Format show ddm  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the DDM global settings: Zxxx0:admin# show ddm Command: show ddm DDM Log...
Page 217: Debug Software Command List
20. Debug Software Command List 20.Debug Software Command List The commands are used to configure the monitoring and logging of protocol communication status and how to handle when an error occurs. The following protocols are supported, as well as general protocols. ...
Page 218 20. Debug Software Command List debug vrrp show flag debug vrrp show log state debug vrrp state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_relay state enable debug dhcpv6_relay state disable debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_relay output [buffer | console] debug dhcpv6_relay packet {all | receiving | sending} state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_server packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable] debug dhcpv6_server state disable...
Page 219 20. Debug Software Command List 20.1. debug error_log  Description Use this command to dump, clear or upload the software error log to a TFTP server.  Format debug error_log [dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]  Parameters dump Display the debug message of the debug log.
Page 220 20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin# debug error_log dump Command: debug error_log dump ************************************************************************** # debug log: 1 # firmware version: 1.0.0.xx # level: CPU exception # clock: 437453880 ms # time : 2000-01-08 05:55:40 ======================== CPU EXCEPTION ======================== Current Task = IP-Tic Stack Pointer = 4CFEA7A0 ---------------------------CP0 Registers----------------------- Status : 1000FC01 Interrupt enable...
Page 221: Debug Buffer
20. Debug Software Command List 20.2. debug buffer  Description Use this command to show the debug buffer's state, or dump, clear, or upload the debug buffer to a TFTP server. When selecting to output to the debug buffer and there are debug messages being outputted, the system memory pool will be used as the debug buffer.
Page 222: Debug Output [Module | All] [Buffer | Console]
20. Debug Software Command List To clear the debug buffer: Zxxx0:admin# debug buffer clear Command: debug buffer clear Success. Zxxx0:admin# To upload the messages stored in debug buffer to TFTP server: Zxxx0:admin# debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt Command: debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt Connecting to server....
Page 223: Debug Config Error_Reboot [Enable | Disable]
20. Debug Software Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To set all module debug message outputs to local console: Zxxx0:admin# debug output all console Command: debug output all console Success. Zxxx0:admin# 20.4. debug config error_reboot ...
Page 224: Debug Config State [Enable | Disable]
20. Debug Software Command List 20.5. debug config state  Description Use the command to set the state of the debug.  Format debug config state [enable | disable]  Parameters enable Enable the debug state. disable Disable the debug state. ...
Page 225: Debug Stp Clear Counter {Ports [ | All]
20. Debug Software Command List  Example To show the error reboot status: Zxxx0:admin#debug show error_reboot state Command: debug show error_reboot state Error Reboot: Enabled Zxxx0:admin# 20.7. debug stp clear counter  Description This command used to clear the STP counters. ...
Page 226: Debug Stp Config Ports
20. Debug Software Command List 20.8. debug stp config ports  Description This command used to configure per-port STP debug level on the specified ports.  Format debug stp config ports [<portlist> | all] [event | bpdu | state_machine | all] state [disable | brief | detail] ...
Page 227: Debug Stp Show Counter {Ports [ | All]
20. Debug Software Command List 20.9. debug stp show counter  Description This command used to display the STP counters.  Format debug stp show counter {ports [<portlist> | all]}  Parameters ports (Optional) Specifies the STP ports for display. <portlist>...
Page 228: Debug Stp Show Flag {Ports
20. Debug Software Command List 20.10. debug stp show flag  Description This command used to display the STP debug level on specified ports.  Format debug stp show flag {ports <portlist>}  Parameters ports (Optional) Specifies the STP ports to display. <portlist>...

Page 229: Debug Stp Show Information
20. Debug Software Command List 20.11. debug stp show information  Description This command used to display STP detailed information, such as the hardware tables, the STP state machine, etc.  Format debug stp show information  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Page 230 20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin# debug stp show information Command: debug stp show information Spanning Tree Debug Information: ---------------------------------------- Port Status In Hardware Table: Instance 0: Port 1 :BLK Port 2 :BLK Port 3 :BLK Port 4 :BLK Port 5 :BLK Port 6 :BLK Port 7 :FOR Port 8 :BLK...
Page 231: Debug Stp State [Disable | Enable]
20. Debug Software Command List 20.12. debug stp state  Description This command is used to enable or disable the STP debug state.  Format debug stp state [enable | disable]  Parameters state Specifies the STP debug state. enable Enable the STP debug state.
Page 232: Debug Ospf
20. Debug Software Command List 20.13. debug ospf  Description This command is used to enable or disable OSPF debug flags.  Format debug ospf [neighbor_state_change | interface_state_change {dr_bdr_selection} | lsa {all | originating | installing | receiving | flooding} (1) | packet {all | receiving | sending} (1) | retransmission | spf {all | intra | inter | extern} (1) | timer | virtual_link | route | redistribution] state [enable | disable] ...
Page 233 20. Debug Software Command List redistribution The state of OSPF redistribution debug. state Specifies to set the OSPF debug global state. enable Specifies that the OSPF debug global state will be enabled. disable Specifies that the OSPF debug global state will be disabled. ...
Page 234: Debug Ospf Clear Counter {Packet | Neighbor | Spf
20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin# debug ospf retransmission state enable Command: debug ospf retransmission state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# To enable all OSPF SPF debug flags: Zxxx0:admin# debug ospf spf all state enable Command: debug ospf spf all state enable Success.
Page 235: Debug Ospf Log State [Enable | Disable]
20. Debug Software Command List 20.15. debug ospf log state  Description This command is used to enable or disable the debug OSPF log.  Format debug ospf log state [enable | disable]  Parameters state Specifies the state of the OSPF debug log. enable Specifies that the OSPF debug log state will be enabled.
Page 236 20. Debug Software Command List If the parameter is not specified, all OSPF counters will be displayed.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To show all OSPF statistic counters: Zxxx0:admin# debug ospf show counter Command: debug ospf show counter OSPF Debug Statistic Counters Packet Receiving: Total...
Page 237 20. Debug Software Command List  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To display all AS external LSAs with detail information: Zxxx0:admin#debug ospf show detail external_link Command: debug ospf show detail external_link OSPF Phase2 External Link: =========== AREA 0.0.0.0: AS-External LSA:...
Page 238 20. Debug Software Command List 20.18. debug ospf show detail net_link  Description This command is used to display all Network LSAs with detail information.  Format debug ospf show detail net_link  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 239: Debug Ospf Show Detail Net_Link
20. Debug Software Command List 20.19. debug ospf show detail rt_link  Description This command is used to display all Router LSAs with detail information.  Format debug ospf show detail rt_link  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 240 20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin#debug ospf show detail rt_link Command: debug ospf show detail rt_link OSPF Phase2 RT Link: =========== AREA 0.0.0.0: Router LSA: Link-State ID: 1.1.1.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.1 LS Age: 10 Seconds Options: 0x2 ..0 = 0 Bit Isn't Set ..
Page 241 20. Debug Software Command List  Example To display all Summary LSAs with detail information: Zxxx0:admin#debug ospf show detail summary_link Command: debug ospf show detail summary_link OSPF Phase2 Summary Link: =========== AREA 0.0.0.0: Summary LSA: Link-State ID: 20.1.1.0 Advertising Router: 10.90.90.91 LS Age: 10 Seconds Options: 0x2 ..
Page 242 20. Debug Software Command List  Example To display all type-7 LSAs with detail information: Zxxx0:admin#debug ospf show detail type7_link Command: debug ospf show detail type7_link OSPF Phase2 NSSA-External Link: =========== AREA 0.0.0.1: NSSA-External LSA: Link-State ID: 0.0.0.0 Advertising Router: 10.90.90.91 LS Age: 855 Seconds Options: 0x2 ..
Page 243: Debug Ospf Show Flag
20. Debug Software Command List 20.22. debug ospf show flag  Description This command is used to display the OSPF debug flag setting.  Format debug ospf show flag  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 244: Debug Ospf Show Log State
20. Debug Software Command List 20.23. debug ospf show log state  Description This command is used to display the OSPF debug log state.  Format debug ospf show log state  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 245: Debug Ospf Show Request_List
20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin# debug ospf show redistribution Command: debug ospf show redistribution OSPF Redistribution List: Nexthop State Type Tag ------------------ --------------- ----- ---- --------------- 1.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 OSPF ASE Table: Nexthop State Type Tag ------------------ --------------- ----- ---- --------------- 1.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0...
Page 246 20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin# debug ospf show request_list Command: debug ospf show request_list OSPF Request List: Area 0.0.0.0: Circuit: 1.1.1.1 Neighbor: 90.2.0.1 IP: 1.1.1.2 LSID: 192.194.134.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1 LSID: 192.194.135.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1 LSID: 192.194.136.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1 LSID: 192.194.137.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1 LSID: 192.194.138.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1...
Page 247: Debug Ospf State [Enable | Disable]
20. Debug Software Command List 20.27. debug ospf state  Description This command is used to set the OSPF debug global state.  Format debug ospf state [enable | disable]  Parameters state Specifies the OSPF debug global state. enable Specifies that the OSPF debug global state will be enabled.
Page 248: Debug Vrrp [Vr_State_Change | Packet [All | {Receiving | Sending}(1)] | Mac_Addr_Update
20. Debug Software Command List 20.28. debug vrrp  Description This command is used to set VRRP debug flags.  Format debug vrrp [vr_state_change | packet [all | {receiving | sending}(1)] | mac_addr_update | interface_change | timers] state [enable | disable] ...
Page 249: Debug Vrrp Clear Counter
20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin# debug vrrp packet all state enable Command: debug vrrp packet all state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# To enable VRRP virtual MAC address update debug flags: Zxxx0:admin# debug vrrp mac_addr_update state enable Command: debug vrrp mac_addr_update state enable Success.
Page 250: Debug Vrrp Log State [Enable | Disable]
20. Debug Software Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To clear VRRP statistic counters: Zxxx0:admin# debug vrrp clear counter Command: debug vrrp clear counter Success Zxxx0:admin# 20.30. debug vrrp log state  Description This command is used to enable or disable the VRRP debug log state.
Page 251: Debug Vrrp Show Counter
20. Debug Software Command List 20.31. debug vrrp show counter  Description This command is used to display the VRRP debug statistic counters.  Format debug vrrp show counter  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 252 20. Debug Software Command List  Example To display VRRP debug flag settings: Zxxx0:admin#debug vrrp show flag Command: debug vrrp show flag Global State: Disabled Current VRRP debug level setting: virtual router state change packet receiving packet sending mac address update interface change timer Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 253: Debug Vrrp State
20. Debug Software Command List 20.34. debug vrrp state  Description The command is used to enable or disable the VRRP debug state.  Format debug vrrp state [enable | disable]  Parameters state Specifies the state of the VRRP debug state. The default setting is disabled. enable Specifies that the VRRP debug state will be enabled.
Page 254 20. Debug Software Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enabled DHCPv6 relay debug function: Zxxx0:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay state enable Command: debug dhcpv6_relay state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 20.36. debug dhcpv6_relay state disable  Description This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 relay Debug function.
Page 255 20. Debug Software Command List 20.37. debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state  Description This command is used to enable or disable debug information flag about the hop count.  Format debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable]  Parameters state Specifies the hop count debugging state. enable Specifies that the hop count state will be enabled.
Page 256 20. Debug Software Command List  Parameters output Specifies the location of the debug message output. buffer Let the debug message output to buffer. console Let the debug message output to console.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 257 20. Debug Software Command List  Example To enabled DHCPv6 relay packet sending debug: Zxxx0:admin# debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable Command: debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 20.40. debug dhcpv6_server packet  Description This command is used to enable or disable the debug information flag of the DHCPv6 server packet, including packets receiving and sending.
Page 258 20. Debug Software Command List 20.41. debug dhcpv6_server state disable  Description This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 server debug functions.  Format debug dhcpv6_server state disable  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 259 20. Debug Software Command List Zxxx0:admin# debug dhcpv6_server state enable Command: debug dhcpv6_server state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 20.43. debug pim ssm  Description This command is used to enable the PIM-SSM debug function.  Format debug pim ssm  Parameters None.
Page 260: Debug Show Status
20. Debug Software Command List 20.44. no debug pim ssm  Description This command is used to disable the PIM-SSM debug function.  Format no debug pim ssm  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 261 20. Debug Software Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To show the specified module's debug state: Prompt# debug show status module MSTP Command: debug show status module MSTP Debug Global State: Enable MSTP : Enable Prompt# To show the debug state:...
Page 262: Dhcp Local Relay Commands
21. DHCP Local Relay Commands 21.DHCP Local Relay Commands DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a function to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server when the client is booted. In general, a series of packets to obtain an IP address is broadcasted. DHCP Local Relay is a function to add option 82 information (the Switching Hub's MAC address and the client's connection port number) to DHCP packets if the client and DHCP server are on the same VLAN.
Page 263 21. DHCP Local Relay Commands config dhcp_local_relay vlan <vlan_name 32> state [enable | disable] config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid <vlan_id> state [enable | disable] enable dhcp_local_relay disable dhcp_local_relay show dhcp_local_relay 21.1. config dhcp_local_relay vlan  Description This command is used to enable or disable the DHCP local relay function for a specified VLAN.
Page 264 21. DHCP Local Relay Commands 21.2. config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid  Description This command is used to enable or disable the DHCP local relay function for a specified VLAN ID.  Format config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid <vlan_id> state [enable | disable] ...
Page 265 21. DHCP Local Relay Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the DHCP local relay function: Zxxx0:admin#enable dhcp_local_relay Command: enable dhcp_local_relay Success. Zxxx0:admin# 21.4. disable dhcp_local_relay ...
Page 266 21. DHCP Local Relay Commands 21.5. show dhcp_local_relay  Description This command is used to display the current DHCP local relay configuration on the Switching Hub.  Format show dhcp_local_relay  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the local DHCP relay status: Zxxx0:admin#show dhcp_local_relay Command: show dhcp_local_relay DHCP/BOOTP Local Relay Status...
Page 267: Dhcp Relay Commands
22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.DHCP Relay Commands DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a function to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server when the client is booted. In general, a series of packets to obtain an IP address is broadcasted. For this reason, the client and DHCP server must be on the same network.
Page 268 22. DHCP Relay Commands  Option 60/61 This is client identification information added to DHCP packets. For example, IP phone model number. You can configure the relay destination or change information, such as an IP address assigned by the DHCP server, according to the client environment based on this information.
Page 269 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.1. config dhcp_relay  Description This command is used to configure the DHCP relay feature of the Switching Hub.  Format config dhcp_relay {hops <int 1-16> | time <sec 0-65535>}(1)  Parameters hops Specify the maximum number of router hops that the DHCP/BOOTP packets can cross. The range is 1 to 16.
Page 270 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.2. config dhcp_relay add ipif  Description This command is used to add an IP destination address to the Switching Hub's DHCP relay table.  Format config dhcp_relay add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>  Parameters <ipif_name 12> Specify the name of the IP interface which contains the IP address below.
Page 271 22. DHCP Relay Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete an IP destination address from the Switching Hub's DHCP relay table: Zxxx0:admin#config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12 Command: config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12 Success.
Page 272 22. DHCP Relay Commands Zxxx0:admin#config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1 exact- match Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1 exact-match Success. Zxxx0:admin# 22.5. config dhcp_relay option_60 default  Description This command is used to configure DHCP relay Option 60 default relay servers. When there are no match servers found for the packet based on Option 60, the relay servers will be determined by the default relay server setting.
Page 273 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.6. config dhcp_relay option_60 delete  Description This command is used to delete a DHCP Option 60 entry. When all is specified, all rules excluding the default rules are deleted.  Format config dhcp_relay option_60 delete [string <multiword 255> {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress <ipaddr>...
Page 274 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.7. config dhcp_relay option_60 state  Description This command is used to decide whether DHCP relay will process the DHCP Option 60 or not. When Option 60 is enabled, if the packet does not have Option 60, then the relay servers cannot be determined based on Option 60.
Page 275 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.8. config dhcp_relay option_61 add  Description This command adds a rule to determine the relay server based on Option 61. The match rule can be based on either MAC address or a user-specified string. Only one relay server can be specified for a MAC address or a string.
Page 276 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.9. config dhcp_relay option_61 default  Description This command is used to determine the rule to process those packets that have no Option 61 matching rules. The default default-rule is drop.  Format config dhcp_relay option_61 default [relay <ipaddr> | drop] ...
Page 277 22. DHCP Relay Commands  Parameters mac_address The entry with the specified MAC address will be deleted <macaddr> Enter the MAC address here. string The entry with the specified string will be deleted. <desc_long 255> The string value can be up to 255 characters long. All rules excluding the default rule will be deleted.
Page 278 22. DHCP Relay Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the state of DHCP relay Option 61: Zxxx0:admin#config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 22.12.
Page 279 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.13. config dhcp_relay option_82 policy  Description This option takes effect only when the check status is disabled. The relay agent does this operation because the packet cannot contain two Option 82s. The default setting is replace.
Page 280 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.14. config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id  Description This command is used to configure the remote ID string of the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 of the Switch.  Format config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id [default | user_define <desc 32>] ...
Page 281 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.15. config dhcp_relay option_82 state  Description This command is used to configure the state of the DHCP relay agent information Option 82 of the Switching Hub. The default settings is disabled.  Format config dhcp_relay option_82 state [enable | disable] ...
Page 282 22. DHCP Relay Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the DHCP relay function: Zxxx0:admin#enable dhcp_relay Command: enable dhcp_relay Success. Zxxx0:admin# 22.17. disable dhcp_relay  Description This command is used to disable the DHCP relay function on the Switching Hub. ...
Page 283 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.18. show dhcp_relay  Description This command is used to display the current DHCP relay configuration.  Format show dhcp_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}  Parameters ipif (Optional) Specify the IP interface name. <ipif_name 12> Specify the IP interface name. The IP interface name can be up to 12 characters long.
Page 284 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.19. show dhcp_relay option_60  Description This command is used to display the DHCP relay option 60 entries.  Format show dhcp_relay option_60 {[string <multiword 255> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | default]}  Parameters string (Optional) Display the entry whose string equals the string specified. <multiword 255>The string can be up to 255 characters long.
Page 285 22. DHCP Relay Commands 22.20. show dhcp_relay option_61  Description This command is used to display all the DHCP relay option 61 rules.  Format show dhcp_relay option_61  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the DHCP option 61 entries: Zxxx0:admin#show dhcp_relay option_61 Command: show dhcp_relay option_61 Default Relay Rule:Drop...
Page 286: Dhcp Server Commands
23. DHCP Server Commands 23.DHCP Server Commands DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a function to obtain an IP address from the DHCP server when the client is booted. This Switching Hub can be used as a DHCP server. Figure 23-1 To use this Switching Hub as a DHCP server, you need to configure the range and expiration time of an IP address assigned to the client.
Page 287 23. DHCP Server Commands clear dhcp binding [<pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all] | all] show dhcp binding {<pool_name 12>} show dhcp pool {<pool_name 12>} show dhcp pool manual_binding {<pool_name 12>} enable dhcp_server disable dhcp_server show dhcp_server clear dhcp conflict_ip [<ipaddr> | all] show dhcp conflict_ip {<ipaddr>} 23.1.
Page 288 23. DHCP Server Commands Zxxx0:admin#create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address 10.10.10.10 Command: create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address 10.10.10.10 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 23.2. delete dhcp excluded_address  Description This command is used to delete a DHCP server exclude address.  Format delete dhcp excluded_address [begin_address <ipaddr>...
Page 289 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.3. show dhcp excluded_address  Description This command is used to display the groups of IP addresses which are excluded from being a legal assigned IP address.  Format show dhcp excluded_address  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.
Page 290 23. DHCP Server Commands  Parameters <pool_name 12> Specify the name of the DHCP pool.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To create a DHCP pool: Zxxx0:admin#create dhcp pool nyknicks Command: create dhcp pool nyknicks Success.
Page 291 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.6. config dhcp pool network_addr  Description This command is used to specify the network for the DHCP pool. The addresses in the network are free to be assigned to the DHCP client. The prefix length specifies the number of bits that comprise the address prefix.
Page 292 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.7. config dhcp pool domain_name  Description This command is used to specify the domain name for the client if the server allocates the address for the client from this pool. The domain name configured here will be used as the default domain name by the client.
Page 293 23. DHCP Server Commands  Parameters <pool_name 12> Specify the DHCP poll name. <ipaddr>(Optional) Specify the IP address of the DNS server. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 294 23. DHCP Server Commands  Example To configure a WINS server IP address: Zxxx0:admin#config dhcp pool netbios_name_server knicks 10.10.10.1 Command: config dhcp pool netbios_name_server knicks 10.10.10.1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 23.10. config dhcp pool netbios_node_type  Description This command is used to specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. The NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four settings: broadcast, peer-to-peer, mixed, or hybrid.
Page 295 23. DHCP Server Commands Zxxx0:admin#config dhcp pool netbios_node_type knicks hybrid Command: config dhcp pool netbios_node_type knicks hybrid Success. Zxxx0:admin# 23.11. config dhcp pool default_router  Description This command is used to specify the IP address of the default router for a DHCP client. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
Page 296 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.12. config dhcp pool lease  Description This command is used to specify the duration of the DHCP pool lease. By default, each IP address assigned by a DHCP server comes with a one-day lease, which is the amount of time that the address is valid.
Page 297 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.13. config dhcp pool boot_file  Description This command is used to specify the name of the file that is used as a boot image. The boot file is used to store the boot image for the client. The boot image is generally the operating system the client uses to load.
Page 298 23. DHCP Server Commands  Parameters <pool_name 12> Specify the DHCP pool name. <ipaddr>(Optional) Specify the IP address of the next server.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the next server: Zxxx0:admin#config dhcp pool next_server engineering 192.168.0.1 Command: config dhcp pool next_server engineering 192.168.0.1 Success.
Page 299 23. DHCP Server Commands Zxxx0:admin#config dhcp ping_packets 4 Command: config dhcp ping_packets 4 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 23.16. config dhcp ping_timeout  Description This command is used to specify the amount of time the DHCP server must wait before timing out a ping packet. By default, the DHCP server waits 100 milliseconds before timing out a ping packet.
Page 300 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.17. create dhcp pool manual_binding  Description This command is used to specify the distinct identification of the client in dotted- hexadecimal notation or hardware address. An address binding is a mapping between the IP address and MAC address of a client. The IP address of a client can be assigned manually by an administrator or assigned automatically from a pool by a DHCP server.
Page 301 23. DHCP Server Commands Zxxx0:admin#create dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1 hardware_address 00-80-C8-02-02-02 type ethernet Command: create dhcp pool manual_binding engineering 10.10.10.1 hardware_address 00-80-C8-02-02-02 type ethernet Success. Zxxx0:admin# 23.18. delete dhcp pool manual_binding  Description This command is used to delete DHCP server manual binding. ...
Page 302: Clear Dhcp Binding
23. DHCP Server Commands 23.19. clear dhcp binding  Description This command is used to clear a binding entry or all binding entries in a pool or clears all binding entries in all pools. Note that this command will not clear the dynamic binding entry which matches a manual binding entry.
Page 303 23. DHCP Server Commands  Parameters <pool_name 12> (Optional) Specify a DHCP pool name.  Restrictions None.  Example To display dynamic binding entries for "engineering": Zxxx0:admin#show dhcp binding engineering Command: show dhcp binding engineering Pool Name IP Addresss Hardware Address Type Status Lifetime...
Page 304 23. DHCP Server Commands Zxxx0:admin#show dhcp pool engineering Command: show dhcp pool engineering Pool Name : engineering Network Address : 10.10.10.0/24 Domain Name : manager.com DNS Server : 10.10.10.1 NetBIOS Name Server : 10.10.10.1 NetBIOS Node Type : Broadcast Default Router : 10.10.10.1 Pool Lease : 10 Days, 0 Hours, 0 Minutes...
Page 305 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.23. enable dhcp_server  Description This command is used to enable the DHCP server function. If DHCP relay is enabled, DHCP server cannot be enabled. The opposite is also true. For Layer 2 Switching Hubs, if DHCP client is enabled on the only interface, then DHCP server cannot be enabled.
Page 306 23. DHCP Server Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To disable the Switch's DHCP server: Zxxx0:admin#disable dhcp_server Command: disable dhcp_server Success. Zxxx0:admin# 23.25. show dhcp_server  Description This command is used to display the current DHCP server configuration. ...
Page 307 23. DHCP Server Commands 23.26. clear dhcp conflict_ip  Description This command is used to clear an entry or all entries from the conflict IP database.  Format clear dhcp conflict_ip [<ipaddr> | all]  Parameters <ipaddr>Specify the IP address to be cleared. Specify that all IP addresses will be cleared.
Page 308 23. DHCP Server Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display the entries in the DHCP conflict IP database: Zxxx0:admin#show dhcp conflict_ip Command: show dhcp conflict_ip IP Address Detection Method Detection Time ----------- ---------------- -------------------- 172.16.1.32 Ping 2007/08/30 17:06:59 172.16.1.32 Gratuitous ARP 2007/09/10 19:38:01 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 309: Dhcp Snooping Commands
24. DHCP Snooping Commands 24.DHCP Snooping Commands The commands are used to allow only clients with a regular IP address assigned by the DHCP server to communicate. When this function is enabled, all ports are set to "untrusted." You need to change the DHCP server and DHCP relay ports to "trusted."...
Page 310 24. DHCP Snooping Commands 24.1. enable dhcp_snoop  Description This command is used to enable DHCP snooping operation on the Switching Hub. This is a global control for the DHCP snooping function. By default, the DHCP snooping function is disabled. ...
Page 311 24. DHCP Snooping Commands 24.2. disable dhcp_snoop  Description This command is used to disable DHCP snooping operation on the Switching Hub. This command disables the DHCP snooping function. By default, the DHCP snooping function is disabled.  Format disable dhcp_snoop ...
Page 312 24. DHCP Snooping Commands 24.3. show dhcp_snoop  Description This command is used to display the DHCP snooping configuration status.  Format show dhcp_snoop  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 313 24. DHCP Snooping Commands 24.4. show dhcp_snoop binding_entry  Description The show dhcp_snoop binding command displays the DHCP snooping binding table information.  Format show dhcp_snoop binding_entry { [ port <port> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | mac_address <macaddr> ] } ...
Page 314: Dhcpv6 Relay Command List
25. DHCPv6 Relay Command List 25.DHCPv6 Relay Command List This is a DHCP Relay function for IPv6. This function is used to configure a DHCPv6 server address on the relay destination for each interface. enable dhcpv6_relay disable dhcpv6_relay config dhcpv6_relay hop_count <value 1-32> config dhcpv6_relay [add | delete] ipif <ipif_name 12>...
Page 315 25. DHCPv6 Relay Command List 25.2. disable dhcpv6_relay  Description This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 relay function on the Switch.  Format disable dhcpv6_relay  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 316 25. DHCPv6 Relay Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the maximum hops of a DHCPv6 relay packet could be transferred to 4: Zxxx0:admin# config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4 Command: config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4 Success.
Page 317 25. DHCPv6 Relay Command List 25.5. config dhcpv6_relay ipif  Description The command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay state of one specific interface or all interfaces.  Format config dhcpv6_relay ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable] ...
Page 318 25. DHCPv6 Relay Command List 25.6. show dhcpv6_relay  Description This command will display the current DHCPv6 relay configuration of all interfaces, or if an IP interface name is specified, the DHCPv6 relay configuration for that IP interface.  Format show dhcpv6_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>} ...
Page 319 25. DHCPv6 Relay Command List Zxxx0:admin# show dhcpv6_relay ipif System Command: show dhcpv6_relay ipif System DHCPv6 Relay Global State : Disabled DHCPv6 Hops Count Limit --------------------------------------------------------------- IP Interface : System DHCPv6 Relay Status : Enabled Server Address : 2001:DB8:1234::218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E Server Address : 3000:90:1::6 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 320: Dhcpv6 Server Commands
26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.DHCPv6 Server Commands The commands are used to configure this Switching Hub as a DHCP server for IPv6. create dhcpv6 pool <pool_name 12> delete dhcpv6 pool [<pool_name 12> | all] show dhcpv6 pool {<pool_name 12>} config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr <pool_name 12> begin <ipv6networkaddr> end <ipv6networkaddr>...
Page 321 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands  Example To create a DHCPv6 pool pool1: Zxxx0:admin# create dhcpv6 pool pool1 Command : create dhcpv6 pool pool1 success Zxxx0:admin# 26.2. delete dhcpv6 pool  Description This command is used to delete one or all DHCPv6 pools. ...
Page 322 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.3. show dhcpv6 pool  Description This command is used to display one or all DHCPv6 pools configuration.  Format show dhcpv6 pool {<pool_name 12>}  Parameters pool Specifies the DHCPv6 pool to be displayed. <pool_name 12> (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name to be displayed here.
Page 323 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.4. config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr  Description This command is used to configure the range of IPv6 network addresses for the DHCPv6 pool. The IPv6 addresses in the range are free to be assigned to any DHCPv6 client.
Page 324 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands  Example To configure the range of ipv6network address for the DHCPv6 pool pool1: Zxxx0:admin# config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr pool1 begin 2000::1/64 end 2000::32/64 Command: config dhcpv6 pool ipv6network_addr pool1 begin 2000::1/64 end 2000::32/64 success Zxxx0:admin# 26.5.
Page 325 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.6. config dhcpv6 pool dns_server  Description This command is used to configure the DNS server's IPv6 addresses for a specific DHCPv6 pool. Users may add up to two DNS Server addresses. If DNS server is not specified, the DNS server information will not be provided to the client.
Page 326 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.7. config dhcpv6 pool lifetime  Description This command is used to configure the preferred-lifetime and valid-lifetime of IPv6 address within a DHCPv6 pool. Preferred lifetime - the length of time that a valid address is preferred (i.e., the time until deprecation).
Page 327 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.8. config dhcpv6 pool manual_binding  Description This command is used to configure a DHCPv6 pool manual binding entry. An address binding is a mapping between the IPv6 address and DUID (A DHCPv6 Unique Identifier for a DHCPv6 participant) of a client. The IPv6 address specified in the manual binding entry must be in the range of the DHCPv6 pool.
Page 328 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.9. show dhcpv6 manual_binding  Description This command will display the manual binding entries for the selected or all DHCPv6 pools.  Format show dhcpv6 manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}  Parameters <pool_name 12> (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Page 329 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.10. show dhcpv6 binding  Description This command is used to show the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information. Entering the command without the pool name will display all information regarding DHCPv6 dynamic binding on the Switching Hub. This command only displays the dynamic binding information, not including manual binding information.
Page 330 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.11. clear dhcpv6 binding  Description This command is used to clear the DHCPv6 dynamic binding information.  Format clear dhcpv6 binding {<pool_name 12>}  Parameters <pool_name 12> (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Page 331 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands  Example To configure the DHCPv6 server global state to enable: Zxxx0:admin# enable dhcpv6_server Command: enable dhcpv6_server Success. Zxxx0:admin# 26.13. disable dhcpv6_server  Description This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 server function on the Switch ...
Page 332 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.14. show dhcpv6_server  Description This command is used to display the DHCPv6 server setting.  Format show dhcpv6_server {ipif <ipif_name 12>}  Parameters ipif (Optional) Specifies the IP interface name to be displayed. <ipif_name 12> Enter the IP interface name to be displayed here.
Page 333 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.15. config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address  Description This command is used to configure the reserved IPv6 addresses on the DHCPv6 server.  Format config dhcpv6 pool excluded_address <pool_name 12> [add begin <ipv6addr> end <ipv6addr> | delete [begin <ipv6addr> end <ipv6addr> | all]] ...
Page 334 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.16. show dhcpv6 excluded_address  Description This command is used to display the groups of IPv6 addresses which are excluded from the legal assigned IPv6 address  Format show dhcpv6 excluded_address {<pool_name 12>}  Parameters <pool_name 12> (Optional) Enter the DHCPv6 pool name used here.
Page 335 26. DHCPv6 Server Commands 26.17. config dhcpv6_server ipif  Description This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 Server state per interface.  Format config dhcpv6_server ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]  Parameters ipif Specifies the IP interface used. <ipif_name 12>...
Page 336: Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (Dvmrp) Commands
27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands 27.Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands Sending data simultaneously multiple destinations called "multicast" and used for music and video distribution. DVMRP (Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol) is one of multicast routing protocols. It exchanges route information from the distribution source to the distribution destination with adjacent routers and manages the shortest route in a routing table like RIP.
Page 337 27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands config dvmrp [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {metric <value 1-31> | probe <sec 1-65535> | neighbor_timeout <sec 1-65535> | state [enable | disable]} enable dvmrp disable dvmrp show dvmrp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} show dvmrp neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12>...
Page 338: Enable Dvmrp
27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure DVMRP configurations of IP interface called 'System': Zxxx0:admin# config dvmrp ipif System neighbor_timeout 30 metric 1 probe 5 Command: config dvmrp ipif System neighbor_timeout 30 metric 1 probe 5 Success Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 339 27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands 27.3. disable dvmrp  Description This command is used to disable the DVMRP global state on the Switch.  Format disable dvmrp  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 340 27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display DVMRP configurations: Zxxx0:admin#show dvmrp Command: show dvmrp DVMRP Global State : Disabled Interface IP Address Neighbor Timeout Probe Metric State ------------ ----------------- ---------------- ----- ------ -------- System 192.168.69.123...
Page 341 27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show dvmrp neighbor Command: show dvmrp neighbor DVMRP Neighbor Address Table Interface Neighbor Address Generation ID Expire Time --------------- ---------------- ------------- ----------- System 10.48.74.123 Total Entries : 1 Zxxx0:admin# 27.6. show dvmrp nexthop ...
Page 342 27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show dvmrp nexthop Command: show dvmrp nexthop Source Address/NetMask Interface Name Type ---------------------- --------------- ------ 10.0.0.0/8 Leaf 10.0.0.0/8 Leaf 20.0.0.0/8 System Leaf 20.0.0.0/8 Leaf 30.0.0.0/8 System Leaf 30.0.0.0/8 Leaf Total Entries : 6 Zxxx0:admin# 27.7.
Page 343 27. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show dvmrp routing_table Command: show dvmrp routing_table DVMRP Routing Table Source Address/Netmask Upstream Neighbor Metric Learned Interface Expire ---------------------- ----------------- ------ ------- ---------- ------ 10.0.0.0/8 10.90.90.90 Local System 20.0.0.0/16 20.1.1.1 Local 30.0.0.0/24 30.1.1.1 Local...
Page 344: Domain Name System (Dns) Relay Commands
28. Domain Name System (DNS) Relay Commands 28.Domain Name System (DNS) Relay Commands DNS (Domain Name System) is a function to manage server domain names. Domain names are named based on hierarchical structure rules. The DNS server, which corresponds to domain name hierarchies, manages a mapping between domain names and IP addresses.
Page 345 28. Domain Name System (DNS) Relay Commands config dnsr [[primary | secondary] nameserver <ipaddr> | [add | delete] static <domain_name 32> <ipaddr>] enable dnsr {[cache | static]} disable dnsr {[cache | static]} show dnsr {static} 28.1. config dnsr  Description This command is used to add or delete a static entry into the Switch's DNS resolution table, or set up the relay server.
Page 346 28. Domain Name System (DNS) Relay Commands To add the entry "dns1" with IP address 10.24.22.5 to the DNS static table: Zxxx0:admin#config dnsr add static dns1 10.24.22.5 Command: config dnsr add static dns1 10.24.22.5 Success. Zxxx0:admin# To delete the entry "dns1" with IP address 10.24.22.5 from the DNS static table: Zxxx0:admin#config dnsr delete static dns1 10.24.22.5 Command: config dnsr delete static dns1 10.24.22.5 Success.
Page 347 28. Domain Name System (DNS) Relay Commands To enable cache lookup for DNS relay: Zxxx0:admin#enable dnsr cache Command: enable dnsr cache Success. Zxxx0:admin# To enable static table lookup for DNS relay: Zxxx0:admin#enable dnsr static Command: enable dnsr static Success. Zxxx0:admin# 28.3.
Page 348 28. Domain Name System (DNS) Relay Commands To disable cache lookup for DNS relay: Zxxx0:admin#disable dnsr cache Command: disable dnsr cache Success. Zxxx0:admin# To disable static table lookup for DNS relay: Zxxx0:admin#disable dnsr static Command: disable dnsr static Success. Zxxx0:admin# 28.4.
Page 349 28. Domain Name System (DNS) Relay Commands Zxxx0:admin#show dnsr Command: show dnsr DNSR Status : Disabled Primary Name Server : 0.0.0.0 Secondary Name Server : 0.0.0.0 DNSR Cache Status : Disabled DNSR Static Table Status : Disabled DNS Relay Static Table Domain Name IP Address ----------------------------------------- ---------------...
Page 350: Dns Resolver Commands
29. DNS Resolver Commands 29.DNS Resolver Commands DNS (Domain Name System) is function to manage server domain names. Domain names are named based on hierarchical structure rules. The DNS server, which corresponds to domain name hierarchies, manages a mapping between domain names and IP addresses. Access to a web server becomes available after sending an inquiry to the DNS server and obtaining an IP address from the domain name (name resolution).
Page 351 29. DNS Resolver Commands 29.1. config name_server add  Description This command is used to add a DNS resolver name server to the Switch.  Format config name_server add <ipaddr> {primary}  Parameters <ipaddr> Enter the DNS Resolver name server IP address used here. primary (Optional) Specifies that the name server is a primary name server.
Page 352 29. DNS Resolver Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete DNS Resolver name server 10.10.10.1: Zxxx0:admin# config name_server delete 10.10.10.10 Command: config name_server delete 10.10.10.10 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 29.3. config name_server timeout ...
Page 353 29. DNS Resolver Commands 29.4. show name_server  Description This command is used to display the current DNS Resolver name servers and name server time out on the Switch.  Format show name_server  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the current DNS Resolver name servers and name server time out: Zxxx0:admin# show name_server Command: show name_server...
Page 354 29. DNS Resolver Commands 29.5. create host_name  Description This command is used to create the static host name entry of the Switch.  Format create host_name <name 255> <ipaddr>  Parameters <name 255> Enter the hostname used here. This name can be up to 255 characters long. <ipaddr>...
Page 355 29. DNS Resolver Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete the static host name entry "www.example.com": Zxxx0:admin# delete host_name www.example.com Command: delete host_name www.example.com Success. Zxxx0:admin# 29.7. show host_name ...
Page 356 29. DNS Resolver Commands Zxxx0:admin# show host_name Command: show host_name Static Host Name Table Host Name IP Address ------------------------------ --------------- www.example.com 10.10.10.10 www.exampla.com 20.20.20.20 Total Static Entries: 2 Dynamic Host Name Table Host Name IP Address ------------------------------ --------------- -------- www.examplc.com 30.30.30.30 60 minutes www.exampld.com...
Page 357 29. DNS Resolver Commands 29.9. disable dns_resolver  Description This command is used to disable the DNS Resolver state of the Switch.  Format disable dns_resolver  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 358: Fdb Commands
30. FDB Commands 30.FDB Commands Forwarding Database (FDB) is a mapping table between the MAC addresses of network devices and the destination VLANs or ports. A Switching Hub accesses FDB using the MAC address information of a receive packet and determines the destination VLAN or port. FDB is usually created automatically from receive packet information.
Page 359: Create Fdb
30. FDB Commands 30.1. create fdb  Description This command is used to make an entry into the Switching Hub's unicast MAC address forwarding database.  Format create fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]  Parameters <vlan_name 32> Specify a VLAN name associated with a MAC address.
Page 360 30. FDB Commands  Parameters <vidlist> Enter the VLAN ID used here. <macaddr> Specify the MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table. port The Switching Hub will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port. <port>Specify the port number corresponding to the MAC destination address.f drop Specify to have the Switching Hub drop traffic.
Page 361 30. FDB Commands  Example To create multicast MAC forwarding: Zxxx0:admin# create multicast_fdb default 01-00-00-00-01-01 Command: create multicast_fdb default 01-00-00-00-01-01 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 30.4. config multicast_fdb  Description This command is used to configure the multicast MAC address forwarding table.  Format config multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32>...
Page 362 30. FDB Commands 30.5. config fdb aging_time  Description This command is used to set the age-out timer for the Switching Hub's dynamic unicast MAC address forwarding tables.  Format config fdb aging_time <sec 10-1000000>  Parameters <sec 10-1000000> - Specify the time in seconds that a dynamically learned MAC address will remain in the Switching Hub's MAC address forwarding table without being accessed, before being dropped from the database.
Page 363 30. FDB Commands 30.6. config multicast vlan_filtering_mode  Description This command is used to configure the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.  Format config multicast vlan_filtering_mode [vlanid <vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | all] [forward_all_groups | forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups] ...
Page 364: Delete Fdb
30. FDB Commands 30.7. delete fdb  Description This command is used to delete a permanent FDB entry.  Format delete fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>  Parameters <vlan_name 32> Specify the name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Page 365: Clear Fdb
30. FDB Commands 30.8. clear fdb  Description This command is used to clear the Switching Hub's forwarding database of all dynamically learned MAC addresses.  Format clear fdb [vlan <vlan_name 32> | port <port> | all ]  Parameters vlan Specify the name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides.
Page 366: Show Fdb
30. FDB Commands  Parameters vlan (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. <vlan_name 32> The maximum length is 32 characters. vlanid (Optional) Specifies the VLAN ID on which the MAC address resides. <vidlist> Enter the VLAN ID used here.
Page 367 30. FDB Commands  Parameters port (Optional) Specify the entries for one port. <port>Specify the entries for one port. vlan (Optional) Specify to display the entries for a specific VLAN. <vlan_name 32> The maximum length is 32 characters. vlanid (Optional) Specify to display the entries by VLAN ID list. <vidlist>...
Page 368 30. FDB Commands 30.11. show multicast vlan_filtering_mode  Description This command is used to display the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.  Format show multicast vlan_filtering_mode {[vlanid <vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32>]}  Parameters vlanid (Optional) Specify to display the entries by VLAN ID list. <vidlist>...
Page 369: File System Management Commands
31. File System Management Commands 31.File System Management Commands The commands are used to manage storage media files on this Switching Hub and mounted SD card. You can check/format media information, change the drive, create/ change/delete a directory, and display/rename/delete/copy/move a file.
Page 370 31. File System Management Commands To display storage media information: Zxxx0:admin#show storage_media_info Command: show storage_media_info Unit Drive Media Type Size Label FS Type ---- ----- ---------- -------- ----------- ------- Flash 123 MB Zxxx0:admin# 31.2. md  Description This command is used to create a directory. ...
Page 371 31. File System Management Commands 31.3. rd  Description This command is used to remove a directory. If there are files and directories still existing in the directory, this command will fail and return an error message.  Format rd {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> ...
Page 372 31. File System Management Commands 31.4. cd  Description This command is used to change the current directory. The user can change the current directory to another drive using this command. The current drive and current directory will be displayed if the <pathname> is not specified. ...
Page 373 31. File System Management Commands  Parameters unit Specifies the unit ID in the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master unit. <unit_id> Enter the unit ID value here. <drive_id> Specifies the drive ID. If not specified, it refers to the current drive. <pathname>...
Page 374 31. File System Management Commands 31.6. rename  Description This command is used to rename a file in the file system. The pathname specifies the file (in path form) to be renamed and the file name specifies the new file name. If the path name is not a full path, then it refers to a path under the current directory for the drive.
Page 375 31. File System Management Commands 31.7. erase  Description This command is used to delete a file stored in the file system. The system will prompt if the target file is a bootup image/configuration or the last image.  Format erase {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>...
Page 376 31. File System Management Commands 31.8. format  Description This command is used to format a specific drive.  Format format {unit <unit_id>} <drive_id> {[fat16 | fat32]} {<label_name>}  Parameters unit Specifies the unit ID in the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master unit. <unit_id>...
Page 377 31. File System Management Commands 31.9. del  Description This command is used to delete a file. It is also used to delete a directory and its contents. The system will prompt if the target file is a bootup image/configuration or the last image.
Page 378 31. File System Management Commands 31.10. move  Description This command is used to move a file around the file system. Note that when a file is moved, it can be specified whether to be renamed at the same time. ...
Page 379 31. File System Management Commands 31.11. copy  Description This command is used to copy a file to another file in the file system.  Format copy {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>  Parameters unit Specifies the unit ID in the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master unit. <unit_id>...
Page 380: Change Drive
31. File System Management Commands 31.12. change drive  Description This command is used to change the current drive.  Format change drive {unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>  Parameters unit (Optional) Specifies the unit ID in the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master unit.
Page 381: Filter Commands
32. Filter Commands 32.Filter Commands The commands are used to filter packets from the DHCP server and NetBIOS over TCP/IP and NetBIOS packets. The DHCP server packet filtering allows you to limit the number of DHCP servers to be used if there are multiple DHCP servers on the network.
Page 382 32. Filter Commands 32.1. config filter dhcp_server  Description This command has two purposes: to specify to filter all DHCP server packets on the specific port and to specify to allow some DHCP server packets with pre-defined server IP addresses and client MAC addresses. With this function, we can restrict the DHCP server to service specific DHCP clients.
Page 383 32. Filter Commands delete permit server_ip Specify the delete permit server IP address. <ipaddr> Specify the IP address. client_mac (Optional) Specify the MAC address of the DHCP client. <macaddr> Specify the MAC address. ports Specify the ports. <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be configured. Specify to configure all ports.
Page 384 32. Filter Commands To configure the filter DHCP server state: Zxxx0:admin#config filter dhcp_server ports 1-10 state enable Command: config filter dhcp_server ports 1-10 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 32.2. show filter dhcp_server  Description This command is used to display the DHCP server/client filter list created on the Switching Hub.
Page 385 32. Filter Commands 32.3. config filter extensive_netbios  Description This command is used to configure the Switching Hub to deny NetBIOS packets over 802.3 frames on the network. Enabling the filterNetBIOS packets over 802.3 frames will create one access profile and one access rule per port automatically. Filter commands in this file will share the same access profile.
Page 386 32. Filter Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the extensive NetBIOS filter state on the Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#show filter extensive_netbios Command: show filter extensive_netbios Enabled Ports: 1-3 Zxxx0:admin# 32.5. config filter netbios  Description This command is used to configure the Switch to deny NetBIOS packets on the network.
Page 387 32. Filter Commands  Example To configure the NetBIOS filter state: Zxxx0:admin#config filter netbios 1-10 state enable Command: config filter netbios 1-10 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 32.6. show filter netbios  Description This command is used to display the NetBIOS filter state on the Switching Hub. ...
Page 388: Gratuitous Arp Commands
33. Gratuitous ARP Commands 33.Gratuitous ARP Commands ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used to calculate a MAC address from an IP address if the destination MAC address is unknown. Gratuitous ARP is a special ARP packet sent when an IP interface is booted, sending an inquiry by setting its own IP address instead of the destination IP address.
Page 389 33. Gratuitous ARP Commands 33.1. enable gratuitous_arp  Description This command is used to enable the gratuitous ARP trap and log state. The Switching Hub can trap and log the IP conflict event to inform the administrator.  Format enable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1) ...
Page 390 33. Gratuitous ARP Commands  Parameters ipif (Optional) The interface name of the L3 interface. <ipif_name 12> Specify the name of the interface. The maximum length is 12 characters. trap Specify trap. The trap is disabled by default. Specify log. The even log is enabled by default. ...
Page 391 33. Gratuitous ARP Commands Zxxx0:admin# config gratuitous_arp learning enable Command: config gratuitous_arp learning enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 33.4. config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected  Description This command is used to enable or disable the sending of gratuitous ARP requests when a duplicate IP address is detected. By default, the state is disabled. For this command, duplicate IP detected means that the system received an ARP request packet that is sent by an IP address that matches the system's own IP address.
Page 392 33. Gratuitous ARP Commands 33.5. config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up  Description This command is used to enable or disable the sending of gratuitous ARP requests when the IP interface status becomes up. This is used to automatically announce the interface's IP address to other nodes. By default, the state is disabled. When the state is enabled and IP interface is linked up, one gratuitous ARP packet will be broadcast.
Page 393 33. Gratuitous ARP Commands 33.6. config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif  Description This command is used to configure the interval for the periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request packets.  Format config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif <ipif_name 12> interval <value 0-65535> ...
Page 394 33. Gratuitous ARP Commands 33.7. show gratuitous_arp  Description This command is used to display gratuitous ARP configuration.  Format show gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}  Parameters ipif (Optional) The interface name of the L3 interface. <ipif_name 12> Specify the name of the interface. The maximum length is 12 characters. ...
Page 395: Internet Group Management Protocol (Igmp) Commands
34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands 34.Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands In multicast where data is simultaneously sent to multiple destinations, destinations are managed in a unit called "group." Each group has its own unique multicast IP address and multicast MAC address assigned. A client that wants to join multicast can be a member of the group after sending a notification that it joins a specific multicast group to neighbor routers.
Page 396 34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands 34.1. config igmp  Description This command is used to configure IGMP on the Switch.  Format config igmp [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {version <value 1-3> | query_interval <sec 1- 31744> | max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-7> | last_member_query_interval <value 1-25>...
Page 397 34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable IGMP version 1 for the IP interface "System": Zxxx0:admin# config igmp ipif System version 1 state enable Command: config igmp ipif System version 1 state enable Success.
Page 398: Show Igmp Group
34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands Zxxx0:admin#show igmp Command: show igmp IGMP Interface Configurations Interface IP Address/Netmask Ver- Query Maximum Robust- Last State sion Response ness Member Time Value Query Interval ------------ ------------------ ---- ------ -------- ------- -------- -------- System 10.90.90.90/8 Disabled...
Page 399 34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show igmp group Command: show igmp group Interface Multicast Group Last Reporter IP Querier IP Expire ------------ --------------- --------------- ------------------- --------- System 224.0.0.2 10.42.73.111 10.48.74.122 System 224.0.0.9 10.20.53.1 10.48.74.122 System 224.0.1.24 10.18.1.3 10.48.74.122 System 224.0.1.41...
Page 400 34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands  Example To enable the checking of subscriber source IP addresses when an IGMP report or leave message is received on the interface called 'System': Zxxx0:admin# config igmp check_subscriber_source_network ipif System enable Command: config igmp check_subscriber_source_network ipif System enable Success.
Page 401 34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands To show the status of the check subscriber for the received IGMP report/leave messages on all interfaces: Zxxx0:admin# show igmp check_subscriber_source_network Command: show igmp check_subscriber_source_network Interface IP Address/Netmask Check Subscriber Source Network ------------ ------------------ ------------------------------- System 10.90.90.90/8...
Page 402 34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands 34.7. delete igmp static_group ipif  Description This command is used to delete an IGMP static group on the Switch.  Format delete igmp static_group ipif <ipif_name 12> [group <ipaddr> | all]  Parameters ipif Specifies the IP interface name used for this configuration.
Page 403 34. Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Commands 34.8. show igmp static_group  Description This command is used to display IGMP static groups on the Switch.  Format show igmp static_group {ipif <ipif_name 12>}  Parameters ipif (Optional) Specifies the IP interface name used for this configuration. <ipif_name 12>...
Page 404: Igmp Proxy Commands
35. IGMP Proxy Commands 35.IGMP Proxy Commands IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a protocol to manage multicast groups. IGMP proxy is a function to transfer IGMP packets from multicast members to the upstream router. If a multicast transmission route is fixed, this function can transfer multicast packets between routers on the fixed route without using a multicast routing protocol.
Page 405 35. IGMP Proxy Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the IGMP proxy: Zxxx0:admin#enable igmp_proxy Command: enable igmp_proxy Success. Zxxx0:admin# 35.2. disable igmp_proxy  Description This command is used to disable the IGMP proxy on the Switching Hub. ...
Page 406 35. IGMP Proxy Commands 35.3. config igmp_proxy downstream_if  Description This command is used to configure the IGMP proxy downstream interfaces. The IGMP proxy plays the server role on the downstream interfaces. The downstream interface must be an IGMP-snooping enabled VLAN. ...
Page 407 35. IGMP Proxy Commands 35.4. config igmp_proxy upstream_if  Description This command is used to configure the setting for the IGMP proxy's upstream interface. The IGMP proxy plays the host role on the upstream interface. It will send IGMP report packets to the router port. The source IP address determines the source IP address to be encoded in the IGMP protocol packet.
Page 408 35. IGMP Proxy Commands  Example To configure the router port of IGMP proxy's upstream interface: Zxxx0:admin#config igmp_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add 3 Command: config igmp_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add 3 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 35.5. show igmp_proxy  Description This command displays IGMP proxy configuration information or group information on the Switching Hub.
Page 409 35. IGMP Proxy Commands  Example To display IGMP proxy information: Zxxx0:admin#show igmp_proxy Command: show igmp_proxy IGMP Proxy Global State : Enabled Upstream Interface VLAN ID Dynamic Router Ports : 1-4 Static Router Ports : 5-6 Unsolicited Report Interval : 10 Source IP Address : 0.0.0.0 Downstream Interface...
Page 410: Igmp Snooping Commands
36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.IGMP Snooping Commands IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) is a protocol to manage multicast groups. IGMP snooping is a filtering function to monitor IGMP packets flowing on ports of the Switching Hub and prevent data from flowing to unnecessary ports.
Page 411 36. IGMP Snooping Commands config igmp_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr> [add | delete] <portlist> delete igmp_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr> show igmp_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>} show igmp_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>] clear igmp_snooping statistics counter show igmp_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32>...
Page 412 36. IGMP Snooping Commands fast_leave Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function. If enabled, the membership is immediately removed when the system receive the IGMP leave message. enable Enable the IGMP snooping fast leave function. disable Disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function. proxy_reporting Specifies the proxy reporting option.
Page 413 36. IGMP Snooping Commands  Parameters vlan_name Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured. <vlan_name 32> Specify the VLAN name. The maximum length is 32 characters. vlanid Specify the VLAN ID list. <vlanid_list>...
Page 414 36. IGMP Snooping Commands state If the state is enable, it allows the Switching Hub to be selected as a IGMP Querier (sends IGMP query packets). If the state is disabled, then the Switching Hub can not play the role as a querier. Note that if the Layer 3 router connected to the Switching Hub provides only the IGMP proxy function but does not provide the multicast routing function, then this state must be configured as disabled.
Page 415 36. IGMP Snooping Commands vlanid Specify the VLAN ID list. <vlanid_list> Specify the VLAN ID list. Specify to add the router ports. delete Specify to delete the router ports. <portlist>Specify a range of ports to be configured.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 416 36. IGMP Snooping Commands  Example To set up port range 1 to 7 to be forbidden router ports of the default VLAN: Zxxx0:admin#config router_ports_forbidden default add 1-7 Command: config router_ports_forbidden default add 1-7 Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 417 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.5. enable igmp_snooping  Description This command allows you to enable IGMP snooping on the Switching Hub.  Format enable igmp_snooping  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 418 36. IGMP Snooping Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To disable IGMP snooping: Zxxx0:admin#disable igmp_snooping Command: disable igmp_snooping Success. Zxxx0:admin# 36.7. show igmp_snooping  Description This command is used to display the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switching Hub.
Page 419 36. IGMP Snooping Commands Zxxx0:admin#show igmp_snooping Command: show igmp_snooping IGMP Snooping Global State : Disabled VLAN Name : default Query Interval : 125 Max Response Time : 10 Robustness Value Last Member Query Interval Querier State : Disable Querier Role : Non-Querier Querier IP : 0.0.0.0...
Page 420 36. IGMP Snooping Commands <ipaddr>(Optional) Specify the group IP address for which to view IGMP snooping group information. If no parameter is specified, the system will display all of the current IGMP snooping group configuration of the Switching Hub.  Restrictions None.
Page 421 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.9. config igmp_snooping rate_limit  Description This command is used to configure the upper limit per second for ingress IGMP control packets.  Format config igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> | no_limit] ...
Page 422 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.10. show igmp_snooping rate_limit  Description This command is used to display the IGMP snooping rate limit setting.  Format show igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]  Parameters ports Specify a range of ports to be displayed. <portlist>...
Page 423 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.11. create igmp_snooping static_group  Description This command allows users to create an IGMP snooping static group. Member ports can be added to the static group. The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a group. The static group will only take effect when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN.
Page 424 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.12. config igmp_snooping static_group  Description This command is used to configure an IGMP snooping static group on the Switching Hub. When a port is configured as a static member port, the IGMP protocol will not operate on this port.
Page 425 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.13. delete igmp_snooping static_group  Description This command is used to delete an IGMP snooping static group on the Switching Hub. The deletion of an IGMP snooping static group will not affect the IGMP snooping dynamic member ports for a group. ...
Page 426 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.14. show igmp_snooping static_group  Description This command is used to display the IGMP snooping static multicast group.  Format show igmp_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>}  Parameters vlan Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides. <vlan_name 32>...
Page 427 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.15. show igmp_snooping statistic counter  Description This command is used to display the IGMP snooping statistics counter for IGMP protocol packets that are transmitted or received by the Switching Hub since IGMP snooping was enabled. ...
Page 428 36. IGMP Snooping Commands Zxxx0:admin#show igmp_snooping statistic counter ports 1 Command: show igmp_snooping statistic counter ports 1 Port # -------------------------------------------------- Group Number Receive Statistics Query IGMP v1 Query IGMP v2 Query IGMP v3 Query Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Multicast VLAN Report &...
Page 429 36. IGMP Snooping Commands 36.16. clear igmp_snooping statistics counter  Description This command is used to clear the IGMP snooping statistics counter on the Switching Hub.  Format clear igmp_snooping statistics counter  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 430 36. IGMP Snooping Commands vlanid (Optional) Specify a list of VLANs to be displayed. <vlanid_list> Specify the VLAN ID list. If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current IGMP snooping forwarding table entries of the Switching Hub. ...
Page 431 36. IGMP Snooping Commands vlanid Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides. <vlanid_list> Specify the VLAN ID list. Specifies that all the VLAN's will be displayed. static (Optional)Display router ports that have been statically configured. dynamic (Optional) Display router ports that have been dynamically registered.
Page 432: Ip Multicasting Commands
37. IP Multicasting Commands 37.IP Multicasting Commands The commands are used to display multicast routing information stored in this Switching Hub. IP multicast forwarding table and IP multicast forwarding cache information are displayed. You can display the IP multicast forwarding table with routing protocols (DVMRP, PIM) and currently disabled items specified.
Page 433 37. IP Multicasting Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display the IP Multicast interface table: Zxxx0:admin# show ipmc Command: show ipmc Interface IP Address Multicast Routing ----------- ----------------- ----------------- System 10.90.90.90 INACT 1.3.2.3 PIM-SM 2.3.2.3 PIM-SM-DM 3.3.2.3 PIM-DM 4.3.2.3 DVMRP Total Entries : 5 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 434 37. IP Multicasting Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ipmc cache Command: show ipmc cache Multicast Source Upstream Expire Routing Group Address/Netmask Neighbor Time Protocol --------------- ----------------- ----------- ------- ----------- 224.1.1.1 10.48.74.121/8 10.48.75.63 DVMRP 224.1.1.1 20.48.74.25/8 20.48.75.25 PIM_DM 224.1.2.3 10.48.75.3/8 10.48.76.6 DVMRP Total Entries : 3 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 435: Ip Routing Commands
38. IP Routing Commands 38.IP Routing Commands IP routing is a process to transfer packets based on the destination IP address in TCP/IP network. Destination information is managed in a routing table in this Switching Hub. In this chapter, you will display/delete a routing table and register items manually.
Page 436: Create Iproute
38. IP Routing Commands 38.1. create iproute  Description This command is used to create an IP route entry in the Switching Hub's IP routing table. This command creates an IP route entry in the Switching Hub's IP routing table. "Primary"...
Page 437: Delete Iproute
38. IP Routing Commands Zxxx0:admin#create iproute default 10.48.74.121 Command: create iproute default 10.48.74.121 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 38.2. delete iproute  Description This command is used to delete an IP route entry from the Switching Hub's IP routing table.  Format delete iproute [default | <network_address>] [null0 | <ipaddr> | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>] ...
Page 438: Show Iproute
38. IP Routing Commands 38.3. show iproute  Description This command is used to display the Switching Hub's current IP routing table.  Format show iproute {[<network_address> | <ipaddr>]} {[static | rip | ospf | hardware]}  Parameters <network_address> (Optional) Specify the destination network address of the route want to be displayed. <ipaddr>(Optional) Specify the destination IP address of the route want to be displayed.
Page 439: Create Ipv6Route
38. IP Routing Commands 38.4. create ipv6route  Description This command is used to create an IPv6 static route in the Switching Hub's IP routing table. If the next hop is a global address, it is not necessary to indicate the interface name.
Page 440: Delete Ipv6Route
38. IP Routing Commands 38.5. delete ipv6route  Description This command is used to delete an IPv6 static route from the Switching Hub's IP routing table. If the next hop is a global address, it is not necessary to indicate the interface name.
Page 441: Show Ipv6Route
38. IP Routing Commands 38.6. show ipv6route  Description This command is used to display the Switching Hub's current IPv6 routing table.  Format show ipv6route {[<ipv6networkaddr> | <ipv6addr>]} {[static | ospfv3 | hardware]}  Parameters <ipv6networkaddr> Enter the IPv6 destination network address of the route. <ipv6addr>...
Page 442 38. IP Routing Commands 38.7. enable ecmp ospf  Description This command is used to activate the OSPF ECMP function.  Format enable ecmp ospf  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 443 38. IP Routing Commands  Example To disable the OSPF ECMP function: Zxxx0:admin# disable ecmp ospf Command: disable ecmp ospf Success. Zxxx0:admin# 38.9. config ecmp algorithm  Description This command is used to configure the ECMP route load-balancing algorithm.  Format config ecmp algorithm {ip_destination | [ip_source| crc_low | crc_high] | tcp_udp_port} ...
Page 444 38. IP Routing Commands Zxxx0:admin# config ecmp algorithm ip_destination ip_source Command: config ecmp algorithm ip_destination ip_source Success. Zxxx0:admin# 38.10. show ecmp algorithm  Description This command is used to display the ECMP related settings.  Format show ecmp algorithm  Parameters None.
Page 445: Ip Source Address Verify Commands
39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.IP Source Address Verify Commands config ip_verify_source ports [<portlist>| all] state [enable | disable] config arp_inspection ports [<portlist>| all] state [enable | disable] create ip_source_binding ipaddress [<ipaddr>mac_address<macaddr> port <port>] delete ip_source_binding [ipaddress<ipaddr>mac_address<macaddr>| all] config ip_source_binding ipaddress [<ipaddr>mac_address<macaddr> port <port>] show ip_source_binding [all | ipaddress<ipaddr>mac_address<macaddr>] show ip_verify_source { ports {<portlist>} } enable dhcp_snoop...
Page 446 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands  Example To enable IPSG on port1: Zxxx0:admin# config ip_verify_source ports 1 state enable Command: config ip_verify_source ports 1 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 39.2. config arp_inspection ports  Description This command is used to configure the per port state of dynamic ARP inspection on the Switching Hub.
Page 447 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.3. create ip_source_binding  Description This command is used to create an IPSG entry. One MAC address can be mapped to multiple IP addresses.  Format create ip_source_binding ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> port <port> ...
Page 448 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.4. delete ip_source_binding  Description This command is used to create an to delete an IPSG entry.  Format delete ip_source_binding [ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr>| all]  Parameters ipaddr Specify the IP address of the entry. macaddr Specify the MAC address of the entry.
Page 449 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.5. config ip_source_binding  Description This command is used to update an IPSG entry.  Format config ip_source_binding ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> port <port>]  Parameters ipaddr Specify the IP address of the entry being updated. macaddr Specify the MAC address of the entry being updated.
Page 450 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.6. show ip_source_binding  Description This command is used to show the binding entries.  Format show ip_source_binding [all | ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr>]  Parameters ipaddr Specify the learned IP address of the entry in the database. macaddr Specify the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
Page 451 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands To display the binding entry by IP address and MAC address: Zxxx0:admin# show ip_source_binding ipaddress10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00- Command: show ip_source_binding ipaddress10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11 M(Mode) - D:DHCP,S:Static ACL - A:Active I:Inactive IP Address MAC Address ACL Port --------------------------------------- ----------------- -- -- -----...
Page 452 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands To show the IP Source Address Verify ports: Zxxx0:admin# show ip_verify_source ports Command: show ip_verify_source ports Port ARP Inspection IP Verify Source ----- -------------- ---------------- Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled...
Page 453 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands  Example To enable DHCP snooping mode: Zxxx0:admin# admin# enable dhcp_snoop Command: enable dhcp_snoop Success. Zxxx0:admin# 39.9. disable dhcp_snoop  Description This command is used to disable DHCP snooping. When the DHCP snooping function is disabled, all of the DHCP snooping binding entries will be removed.
Page 454 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.10. clear dhcp_snoop binding_entry  Description This command is used to clear the DHCP Snooping entries learned for the specified ports.  Format clear dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist>|all]  Parameters ports Specify the list of ports used to clear the DHCP snooping entries learned. ...
Page 455 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands If no parameters are specified, all the DHCP snooping configuration.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To show the DHCP snooping state: Zxxx0:admin# show dhcp_snoop Command: show dhcp_snoop DHCP_Snoop : Enabled Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 456 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.12. config dhcp_snoop max_entry  Description This command is used to specify the maximum number of entries that can be learned by a specified port. By default, the maximum number of port entries is unlimited. This command specifies the maximum number of entries that can be learned by the specified ports.
Page 457 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.13. enable ip_verify_source log  Description This command is used to enable IP Source Address Verify logs. This command is used to generate logs when the IP Source Address Verify modules detect an illegal IP and MAC address. ...
Page 458 39. IP Source Address Verify Commands 39.14. disable ip_verify_source log  Description This command is used to disable the IP Source Address Verify logs.  Format disable ip_verify_source log  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 459: Ipv6 Ndp Commands
40. IPv6 NDP Commands 40.IPv6 NDP Commands In IPv6, a protocol called NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol) is used to configure the global IP address of a device connected to the router. The router periodically sends packets called RA (Router Advertisement) to a specified interface.
Page 460 40. IPv6 NDP Commands <ipv6addr> Specify the IPv6 address of the neighbor. <macaddr> Specify the MAC address of the neighbor.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To add a static entry into the NDP table: Zxxx0:admin#create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00:01:02:03:04:05 Command: create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3FFC::1 00-01-02-03-04-05 Success.
Page 461 40. IPv6 NDP Commands  Example To delete the neighbor cache.entry for IPv6 address 3ffc::1 on the IP interface "System": Zxxx0:admin#delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 Command: delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3FFC::1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 40.3. show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif ...
Page 462 40. IPv6 NDP Commands Zxxx0:admin#show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all Command: show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all FE80::215:72FF:FE36:104 State: Reachable MAC Address : 00-15-72-36-01-04 Port : 1:21 Interface : System Total Entries: 1 Zxxx0:admin# 40.4. config ipv6 nd ns ipif ...
Page 463 40. IPv6 NDP Commands 40.5. config ipv6 nd ra ipif  Description This command is used to configure the RA parameters of a specified interface.  Format config ipv6 nd ra ipif <ipif_name 12> {state [enable | disable] | life_time <sec 0-9000> | reachable_time <millisecond 0-3600000>...
Page 464 40. IPv6 NDP Commands other_config_flag Specify to enable or disable the function. enable When set to enable, it indicates that hosts receiving this RA must use a stateful address configuration protocol to obtain on-address configuration information. disable Set to disable to stop hosts receiving this RA from using a stateful address configuration protocol to obtain on-address configuration information.
Page 465 40. IPv6 NDP Commands  Parameters <ipif_name 12> Specify the interface's name. The maximum length is 12 characters. <ipv6networkaddr> Specify the IPv6 network address. preferred_life_time Specify the number in seconds that an address, based on the specified prefix using the stateless address configuration, remains in preferred state.
Page 466: Show Ipv6 Nd
40. IPv6 NDP Commands Zxxx0:admin#config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif ip1 3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64 preferred_life_time 1000 Command: config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif ip1 3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64 preferred_life_time 1000 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 40.7. show ipv6 nd  Description This command is used to display IPv6 Neighbor Discover related configuration. ...
Page 467 40. IPv6 NDP Commands Zxxx0:admin#show ipv6 nd ipif System Command: show ipv6 nd ipif System Interface Name : System Hop Limit : 64 NS Retransmit Time : 400 (ms) Router Advertisement : Disabled RA Max Router AdvInterval : 600 (sec) RA Min Router AdvInterval : 198 (sec) RA Router Life Time : 1800 (sec)
Page 468: Jumbo Frame Commands
41. Jumbo Frame Commands 41.Jumbo Frame Commands In Ethernet, communication data is divided into fixed-size units called "frames" and transmitted. The standard frame has a fixed-size of 1518 bytes. A frame called jumbo frame is larger than the standard frame for more efficient data transmission.
Page 469 41. Jumbo Frame Commands 41.1. enable jumbo_frame  Description This command is used to enable support of Jumbo Frames.  Format enable jumbo_frame  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable Jumbo Frames: Zxxx0:admin#enable jumbo_frame Command: enable jumbo_frame...
Page 470 41. Jumbo Frame Commands Zxxx0:admin#disable jumbo_frame Command: disable jumbo_frame Success. Zxxx0:admin# 41.3. config jumbo_frame ports  Description This command is used to configure the jumbo frame state on specified ports.  Format config jumbo_frame ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] ...
Page 471 41. Jumbo Frame Commands 41.4. show jumbo_frame  Description This command is used to display Jumbo Frames.  Format show jumbo_frame {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Enter the list of ports to be displayed here.  Restrictions None.  Example To display Jumbo Frames for port 1 to 5: Zxxx0:admin#show jumbo_frame 1-5 Command: show jumbo_frame 1-5 Jumbo Frame Global State : Disabled...
Page 472: Lacp Configuration Commands
42. LACP Configuration Commands 42.LACP Configuration Commands Link aggregation is a technology to connect two Switching Hubs with multiple ports and bundle them as one port. This provides path redundancy and enhanced bandwidth. Figure 42-1 LACP overview LACP (Link Aggregate Control Protocol) is a protocol to automatically decide, set, and monitor the port connection status in link aggregation.
Page 473 42. LACP Configuration Commands  Parameters <portlist>Specify a range of ports to be configured. mode Specify the port mode. active Specify the mode as active. passive Specify the mode as passive.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 474 42. LACP Configuration Commands Zxxx0:admin#show lacp_port 1-3 Command: show lacp_port 1-3 Port Activity ------ -------- Active Active Active Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 475: Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2Pt) Command List
43. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) Command List 43.Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) Command List L2PT is a function to enable transferring of L2 protocol frames, such as STP and GVRP, to different networks. In this chapter, you will configure L2PT. Figure 43-1 L2PT overview config l2protocol_tunnel ports [<portlist>...
Page 476 43. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) Command List  Format config l2protocol_tunnel ports [<portlist> | all] type [uni tunneled_protocol [{stp | gvrp | protocol_mac [01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC | 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD]}(1) | all] {threshold <value 0-65535>} | nni | none]  Parameters ports Specify the ports on which the Layer 2 protocol tunneling will be configured. <portlist>...
Page 477 43. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) Command List 43.2. show l2protocol_tunnel  Description This command is used to show Layer 2 protocol tunneling information.  Format show l2protocol_tunnel {[uni | nni]}  Parameters (Optional) Specify show UNI detail information, include tunneled and dropped PDU statistic.
Page 478 43. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) Command List To show Layer 2 protocol tunneling detail information on NNI ports: Zxxx0:admin# show l2protocol_tunnel nni Command: show l2protocol_tunnel nni Protocol Port ---- -------------------- GVRP 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD GVRP 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD Zxxx0:admin# 43.3. enable l2protocol_tunnel ...
Page 479 43. Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) Command List 43.4. disable l2protocol_tunnel  Description Used to disable the Layer 2 protocol tunneling function.  Format disable l2protocol_tunnel  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 480: Limited Multicast Ip Address Commands
44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands 44.Limited Multicast IP Address Commands The commands are used to configure multicast packet filtering out of the target of IGMP/MLD snooping or layer-3 function. create mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} profile_id <value 1-60> profile_name <name 32> config mcast_filter_profile [profile_id <value 1-60>...
Page 481 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To create a multicast address profile named MOD: Zxxx0:admin#create mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 profile_name MOD Command: create mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 profile_name MOD Success.
Page 482 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To add a range of multicast addresses to a profile: Zxxx0:admin#config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 add 225.1.1.1 - 225.1.1.100 Command: config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 add 225.1.1.1 - 225.1.1.100 Success.
Page 483 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To add the IPv6 multicast address range FF0E::100:0:0:20 - FF0E::100:0:0:22 to profile ID 3: Zxxx0:admin#config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 profile_id 3 add FF0E::100:0:0:20 - FF0E::100:0:0:22 Command: config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 profile_id 3 add FF0E::100:0:0:20 - FF0E::100:0:0:22...
Page 484 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands Zxxx0:admin#delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3 Command: delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3 Success. Zxxx0:admin# To delete a multicast profile with a profile named MOD: Zxxx0:admin#delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name MOD Command: delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name MOD Success. Zxxx0:admin# 44.5. show mcast_filter_profile ...
Page 485 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands Zxxx0:admin#show mcast_filter_profile Command: show mcast_filter_profile Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses ---------- --------------------------- ----------------------------- 234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244 234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244 customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200 Total Entries: 2 Zxxx0:admin# 44.6. config limited_multicast_addr  Description This command is used to configure the multicast address filtering function on a port or VLAN.
Page 486 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands profile_name(Optional) Specify a profile name to be added to or deleted from the port or VLAN. <name 32> The profile name can be up to 32 characters long. access (Optional) Specify whether the access is permit or deny. permit Specify that the packets that match the addresses defined in the profiles will be permitted.
Page 487 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display the limited multicast address range on VLAN 1: Zxxx0:admin#show limited_multicast_addr vlanid 1 Command: show limited_multicast_addr vlanid 1 VLAN Access : Deny Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses ----------- ----------- ----------------------------- customer...
Page 488 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands 44.8. config max_mcast_group  Description This command is used to configure the maximum number of multicast groups a port or VLAN can join. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied. When the joined groups for a port or a VLAN have reached the maximum number, the newly learned group will be dropped if the action is specified as drop.
Page 489 44. Limited Multicast IP Address Commands Zxxx0:admin# config max_mcast_group ports 1, 3 max_group 100 Command: config max_mcast_group ports 1, 3 max_group 100 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 44.9. show max_mcast_group  Description This command is used to display the maximum number of multicast groups that a port or VLAN can join.
Page 490: Link Aggregation Commands
45. Link Aggregation Commands 45.Link Aggregation Commands Link aggregation is a technology to connect two Switching Hubs with multiple ports and bundle them as one port. This provides path redundancy and enhanced bandwidth. You can select how to distribute communications to bundled ports from several methods.
Page 491 45. Link Aggregation Commands  Parameters <value 1-48> Specify the group ID. The group number identifies each of the groups. The Switching Hub allows up to 48 link aggregation groups to be configured. type (Optional) Specify the group type belongs to static or LACP. If type is not specified, the default is the static type.
Page 492 45. Link Aggregation Commands  Example To delete a link aggregation group: Zxxx0:admin#delete link_aggregation group_id 3 Command: delete link_aggregation group_id 3 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 45.3. config link_aggregation group_id  Description This command allows you to configure a link aggregation group that was created with the create link_aggregation command above.
Page 493 45. Link Aggregation Commands  Example To configure a link aggregation group, group-id 1, master port 7, member ports 5-7: Zxxx0:admin#config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 7 ports 5-7 Command: config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 7 ports 5-7 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 45.4. config link_aggregation algorithm ...
Page 494 45. Link Aggregation Commands l4_src_port Indicate that the Switching Hub should examine the Layer 4 source port. l4_dest_port Indicate that the Switching Hub should examine the Layer 4 destination port. l4_src_dest_port Indicate that the Switching Hub should examine the Layer 4 source and destination port. ...
Page 495 45. Link Aggregation Commands  Example To display the current link aggregation configuration when link aggregation is enabled: Zxxx0:admin#show link_aggregation Command: show link_aggregation Link Aggregation Algorithm = MAC_Source_Dest Group ID Type : LACP Master Port Member Port : 1-8 Active Port Status : Enabled Flooding Port : 7...
Page 496: Lldp Commands
46. LLDP Commands 46.LLDP Commands LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a function to periodically collect connected device information. If devices, such as an IP phone, printer, and network camera, support LLDP, you can learn what devices are connected where. This function also allows you to identify configuration errors based on collected information and change the protocol settings or Switching Hub operations according to the information.
Page 497: Enable Lldp
46. LLDP Commands config lldp_med ports [<portlist> | all] med_transmit_capabilities [all | {capabilities | network_policy | inventory}(1)] state [enable | disable] show lldp_med ports {<portlist>} show lldp_med show lldp_med local_ports {<portlist>} show lldp_med remote_ports {<portlist>} show lldp local_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]} show lldp mgt_addr {[ipv4 <ipaddr>...
Page 498: Disable Lldp
46. LLDP Commands 46.2. disable lldp  Description This command is used to disable LLDP. The Switching Hub will stop the sending and receiving of LLDP advertisement packets.  Format disable lldp  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 499 46. LLDP Commands  Format config lldp [message_tx_interval <sec 5-32768> | message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2- 10> | tx_delay <sec 1-8192> | reinit_delay <sec 1-10>]  Parameters message_tx_interval Specify the message TX interval between consecutive transmissions of LLDP advertisements on any given port. <sec 5-32768>...
Page 500: Show Lldp
46. LLDP Commands To configure the delay-interval interval: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp tx_delay 8 Command: config lldp tx_delay 8 Success. Zxxx0:admin# To change the re-initialization delay interval to five seconds: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp reinit_delay 5 Command: config lldp reinit_delay 5 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 46.4. show lldp ...
Page 501 46. LLDP Commands  Example To display LLDP: Zxxx0:admin#show lldp Command: show lldp LLDP System Information Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address Chassis ID : 00-11-22-33-44-55 System Name System Description : Gigabit Ethernet Switch System Capabilities : Repeater, Bridge LLDP Configurations LLDP Status : Disabled LLDP Forward Status...
Page 502 46. LLDP Commands  Example To enable LLDP forwarding messages: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp forward_message enable Command: config lldp forward_message enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 46.6. config lldp notification_interval  Description This command is used to configure LLDP timer values. This will globally change the interval between successive LLDP change notifications generated by the Switching Hub.
Page 503: Config Lldp Ports
46. LLDP Commands 46.7. config lldp ports  Description Use this command to configure LLDP options by port. Enable or disable each port for sending change notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s) if an LLDP data change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor. The definition of change includes new available information, information timeout, information update.
Page 504 46. LLDP Commands  Format config lldp ports [<portlist> | all] [notification [enable | disable] | admin_status [tx_only | rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable] | mgt_addr [ipv4 <ipaddr> | ipv6 <ipv6addr>] [enable | disable] | basic_tlvs [{all} | {port_description | system_name | system_description | system_capabilities}] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_pvid [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_protocol_vid [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32>] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32>] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable...
Page 505 46. LLDP Commands basic_tlvs Configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of optional TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements. (Optional) Configure all four TLV data types listed below. port_description (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit "Port Description TLV"...
Page 506 46. LLDP Commands dot1_tlv_vlan_name This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System's VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with multiple VLANs, those enabled VLAN ID will be advertised. The default state is disabled. vlan (Optional) Specify a VLAN to be transmitted.
Page 507 46. LLDP Commands dot3_tlvsAn individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802.3 Organizationally Specific TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements. (Optional) Configure all of the TLV optional data types below. mac_phy_configuration_status (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit "MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV."...
Page 508 46. LLDP Commands To enable ports 1 to 5 to manage address entries: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp ports 1-5 mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10 enable Command: config lldp ports 1-5 mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10 enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# To exclude the system name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable Command: config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable...
Page 509: Show Lldp Ports
46. LLDP Commands To exclude the protocol identity TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# To exclude the MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable Command: config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable...
Page 510 46. LLDP Commands  Example To display LLDP TLV option port 1: Zxxx0:admin#show lldp ports 1 Command: show lldp ports 1 Port ID -------------------------------------------------------------- Admin Status : TX_and_RX Notification Status : Disabled Advertised TLVs Option Port Description Disabled System Name Disabled System Description Disabled...
Page 511 46. LLDP Commands Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To configure a LLDP-MED fast start repeat count of 5: Zxxx0:admin#config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5 Command: config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 46.10. config lldp_med log state ...
Page 512 46. LLDP Commands 46.11. config lldp_med notification topo_change ports  Description This command is used to enable or disable each port for sending topology change notification to configured SNMP trap receiver(s) if an endpoint device is removed or moved to another port. The default state is disabled. ...
Page 513 46. LLDP Commands 46.12. config lldp_med ports  Description This command is used to enable or disable transmitting LLDP-MED TLVs. It effectively disables LLDP-MED on a per-port basis by disabling transmission of TLV capabilities. In this case, the remote table's objects in the LLDP-MED MIB corresponding to the respective port will not be populated.
Page 514 46. LLDP Commands 46.13. show lldp_med ports  Description This command is used to display LLDP-MED per port configuration for advertisement options.  Format show lldp_med ports {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>Specify a range of ports to be displayed. When a port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed. ...
Page 515 46. LLDP Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the Switching Hub's general LLDP-MED configuration status: Zxxx0:admin#show lldp_med Command: show lldp_med LLDP-MED System Information: Device Class : Network Connectivity Device Hardware Revision : A1 Firmware Revision : 1.0.0.xx Software Revision : 1.0.0.xx...
Page 516 46. LLDP Commands When a port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.  Restrictions None.  Example To display LLDP-MED information currently available for populating outbound LLDP- MED advertisements for port 1: Zxxx0:admin#show lldp_med local_ports Command: show lldp_med local_ports 1 Port ID -----------------------------------------------------------------...
Page 517 46. LLDP Commands When a port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.  Restrictions None.  Example To display remote entry information:...
Page 518 46. LLDP Commands Zxxx0:admin#show lldp_med remote_ports 1 Command: show lldp_med remote_ports 1 Port ID : 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Remote Entities Count : 1 Entity 1 Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-00 Port ID Subtype : Net Address Port ID : 172.18.10.11 LLDP-MED capabilities:...
Page 519 46. LLDP Commands Inventory Management: Hardware Revision Firmware Revision Software Revision Serial Number Manufacturer Name Model Name Asset ID Zxxx0:admin# 46.17. show lldp local_ports  Description This command is used to display the per-port information currently available for populating outbound LLDP advertisements. ...
Page 520 46. LLDP Commands  Example To display LLDP local port information for port 1: Zxxx0:admin#show lldp local_ports Command: show lldp local_ports 1 Port ID : 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Port ID Subtype : MAC Address Port ID : 00-01-02-03-05-00 Port Description : Zxxx0 R1.0.0.xx Port 1 on Unit 1 Port PVID Management Address Count...
Page 521 46. LLDP Commands  Example To display the LLDP management address: Zxxx0:admin#show lldp mgt_addr Command: show lldp mgt_addr Address 1 : ------------------------------------------------------ Subtype : IPv4 Address : 10.19.72.38 IF Type : Unknown : 1.3.6.1.4.1.396.5.4.1.xx Advertising Ports Total Entries : 1 Zxxx0:admin# 46.19.
Page 522: Show Lldp Statistics
46. LLDP Commands  Example To display LLDP information for remote ports 1 and 2: Zxxx0:admin#show lldp remote_ports 1-2 Command: show lldp remote_ports 1-2 Remote Entities Count : 0 Zxxx0:admin# 46.20. show lldp statistics  Description This command is used to display an overview of neighbor detection activity on the Switching Hub.
Page 523: Show Lldp Statistics Ports
46. LLDP Commands 46.21. show lldp statistics ports  Description This command is used to display LLDP statistic information for individual ports.  Format show lldp statistics ports {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Specify the ports to be displayed. When a port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
Page 524: Loopback Interface Commands
47. Loopback Interface Commands 47.Loopback Interface Commands A loopback interface is a virtual interface to set this Switching Hub as an output destination. Assigning a network address to a loopback interface allows you to configure a virtual network. It is also used in other protocols, such as OSPF and BGP.
Page 525 47. Loopback Interface Commands  Example To create one loopback interface named loopback1 with subnet address 20.1.1.1/8 and enable the admin state: Zxxx0:admin# create loopback ipif loopback1 20.1.1.1/8 state enable Command: create loopback ipif loopback1 20.1.1.1/8 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 47.2.
Page 526 47. Loopback Interface Commands Zxxx0:admin# config loopback ipif loopback1 ipaddress 10.0.0.1/8 Command: config loopback ipif loopback1 ipaddress 10.0.0.1/8 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 47.3. show loopback ipif  Description This command is used to display the information of the loopback interface.  Format show loopback ipif {<ipif_name 12>} ...
Page 527 47. Loopback Interface Commands 47.4. delete loopback ipif  Description This command is used to delete a loopback interface.  Format delete loopback ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]  Parameters <ipif_name 12> Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration here. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
Page 528: Mac Notification Commands
48. MAC Notification Commands 48.MAC Notification Commands These commands are used to send a notification to the management server using a SNMP trap when a new entry is registered in the MAC address table of this Switching Hub. It detects access to the network from unauthorized devices. Figure 48-1 MAC Notification overview enable mac_notification disable mac_notification...
Page 529 48. MAC Notification Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the MAC notification function: Zxxx0:admin#enable mac_notification Command: enable mac_notification Success. Zxxx0:admin# 48.2. disable mac_notification  Description This command is used to disable the trap notification for new learned MAC addresses on the Switch.
Page 530 48. MAC Notification Commands 48.3. config mac_notification  Description This command is used to configure the Switching Hub's MAC address table notification global settings.  Format config mac_notification {interval <int 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>}(1)  Parameters interval Specify the time interval in seconds to trigger the notification. <int 1-2147483647>...
Page 531 48. MAC Notification Commands  Parameters <portlist>Specify a range of ports to be configured. Specify to set all ports in the system. enable Specify to enable the port's MAC address table notification. disable Specify to disable the port's MAC address table notification. ...
Page 532 48. MAC Notification Commands Zxxx0:admin#show mac_notification Command: show mac_notification Global MAC Notification Settings State : Enabled Interval History Size : 500 Zxxx0:admin# 48.6. show mac_notification ports  Description This command is used to display the port's MAC address table notification status settings.
Page 533: Mac-Based Access Control Commands
49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.MAC-based Access Control Commands MAC-based Access Control is a function to authorize a device connected to the Switching Hub based on its MAC address to control access to the network. A RADIUS server or local database in this Switching Hub can be selected for the authentication server.
Page 534 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.1. enable mac_based_access_control  Description This command is used to enable the MAC-based access control function.  Format enable mac_based_access_control  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 535 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands  Example To disable MAC-based access control: Zxxx0:admin#disable mac_based_access_control Command: disable mac_based_access_control Success. Zxxx0:admin# 49.3. config mac_based_access_control password  Description This command is used to set the password that will be used for authentication via RADIUS server.
Page 536 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.4. config mac_based_access_control method  Description This command is used to authenticate via a local database or a RADIUS server.  Format config mac_based_access_control method [local | radius]  Parameters local Specify to authenticate via local database. radius Specify to authenticate via RADIUS server.
Page 537 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands  Parameters <portlist>When a port is configured as gurest VLAN member port, this port will move to guest VLAN if it's MAC-based access control state is enable.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 538 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands  Parameters <portlist>Specify a range of ports to configure the MAC-based access control settings Specify to select all the ports. state Specify whether the MAC-based access control function is enabled or disabled. enable Specify to enable the MAC-based access control function. disable Specify to disable the MAC-based access control function.
Page 539 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.7. create mac_based_access_control  Description This command is used to create a MAC-based access control guest VLAN.  Format create mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]  Parameters guest_vlan Specify the name of the guest VLAN. <vlan_name 32>...
Page 540 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.8. delete mac_based_access_control  Description This command is used to delete MAC-based access control guest VLANs.  Format delete mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid < vlanid 1-4094>]  Parameters guest_vlan Specify the name of the guest VLAN. <vlan_name 32>...
Page 541 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.9. clear mac_based_access_control auth_state  Description This command is used to clear the authentication state of a user (or port). The port (or the user) will return to un-authenticated state. All the timers associated with the port (or the user) will be reset.
Page 542 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.10. create mac_based_access_control_local  Description This command is used to create a database entry.  Format create mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}  Parameters <macaddr> Specify the MAC address that access accepts by local mode. vlan (Optional) If the MAC address is authorized, the port will be assigned to this VLAN.
Page 543 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.11. config mac_based_access_control_local  Description This command is used to modify a database entry.  Format config mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]  Parameters <macaddr> Specify the MAC address that access is accepted by local mode. vlan If the MAC address is authorized, the port will be assigned to this VLAN.
Page 544: Authorization Attributes
49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.12. config mac_based_access_control max_users  Description This command is used to configure the MAC-based access control maximum number of authorized users.  Format config mac_based_access_control max_users [<value 1-4000> | no_limit]  Parameters <value 1-4000> Specify the maximum number of authorized users. no_limit Specify an unlimited number(4000) of users.
Page 545 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands  Format config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)  Parameters radius Specify to enable or disable the authorized attributes assigned by the RADIUS server that will be accepted. enable If specified to enable, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADIUS server will be accepted if the global...
Page 546 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.14. delete mac_based_access_control_local  Description This command is used to delete a database entry  Format delete mac_based_access_control_local [mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]  Parameters Delete database by this MAC address. <macaddr>...
Page 547 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.15. show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports  Description This command is used to display MAC-based access control authentication MAC information.  Format show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Specify the ports to display.  Restrictions None.
Page 548 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands 49.16. show mac_based_access_control  Description This command is used to display MAC-based access control information.  Format show mac_based_access_control {ports {<portlist>}}  Parameters ports (Optional) Specify to display the MAC-based access control port state. <portlist> Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
Page 549 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands Zxxx0:admin#show mac_based_access_control ports 1-4 Command: show mac_based_access_control ports 1-4 Port State Aging Time Block Time Max User (min) (sec) ----- -------- ---------- --------- -------- Disabled 1440 1024 Disabled 1440 1024 Disabled 1440 1024 Disabled 1440 1024 Zxxx0:admin# 49.17.
Page 550 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands Zxxx0:admin#show mac_based_access_control_local Command: show mac_based_access_control_local MAC Address ----------------- ------ 00-00-00-00-00-01 Total Entries:1 Zxxx0:admin# To display MAC-based access control local data by MAC address: Zxxx0:admin#show mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 Command: show mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 MAC Address ----------------- ------ 00-00-00-00-00-01 Total Entries:1...
Page 551 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands  Parameters state Specifies the log state for MAC-based Access Control. enable Specifies that the log for MAC-based Access Control will be enabled. disable Specifies that the log for MAC-based Access Control will be disabled. ...
Page 552 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands  Example To enable the trap state for MAC-based Access Control: Zxxx0:admin# config mac_based_access_control trap state enable Command: config mac_based_access_control trap state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 49.20. config mac_based_access_control password_type  Description This command is used to configure the type of RADIUS authentication password for MAC-based Access Control.
Page 553 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands Zxxx0:admin# config mac_based_access_control password_type client_mac_address Command: config mac_based_access_control password_type client_mac_address Success. Zxxx0:admin# To configure the MAC-based Access Control using "manual_string" as authentication password: Zxxx0:admin# config mac_based_access_control password_type manual_string Command: config mac_based_access_control password_type manual_string Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 554 49. MAC-based Access Control Commands...
Page 555: Md5 Commands
50. MD5 Commands 50.MD5 Commands create md5 key <key_id 1-255> <password 16> config md5 key <key_id 1-255> <password 16> delete md5 key <key_id 1-255> show md5 {key <key_id 1-255>} 50.1. create md5  Description This command is used to create an MD5 key table. ...
Page 556 50. MD5 Commands 50.2. config md5  Description This command is used to configure an MD5 key and password. The MD5 Configuration allows for the entry of a 16 character Message Digest - version 5 (MD5) key which can be used to authenticate every packet exchanged between OSPF routers.
Page 557 50. MD5 Commands  Parameters <key_id 1-255> Enter the MD5 key to be removed. This key must be between 1 and 255.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To delete an MD5 key table: Zxxx0:admin#delete md5 key 1 Command: delete md5 key 1 Success.
Page 558 50. MD5 Commands Zxxx0:admin#show md5 Command: show md5 MD5 Key Table Configurations Key-ID ------ ---------- zequo1 Total Entries: 1 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 559: Mirror Commands
51. Mirror Commands 51.Mirror Commands The commands are used to mirror (copy) transmit and receive packets on a specified port to other port and monitor packet contents. You can configure the settings, such as mirroring of all transmit and receive packets by setting multiple ports to a mirror group or mirroring of only transmit or receive packets.
Page 560 51. Mirror Commands  Parameters <value 1-4> Enter the mirror group ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example Create mirror group 3: Zxxx0:admin# create mirror group_id 3 Command: create mirror group_id 3 Success.
Page 561 51. Mirror Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To add mirroring target port 6 and the source ports 1 to 5 rx and tx packets: Zxxx0:admin#config mirror port 6 add source ports 1-5 both Command: config mirror port 6 add source ports 1-5 both Success.
Page 562 51. Mirror Commands state (Optional) Specifies the mirror group state to enable or disable the mirror group function. enable Specifies that the mirror group state will be enabled. disable Specifies that the mirror group state will be disabled.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Page 563: Enable Mirror
51. Mirror Commands 51.5. enable mirror  Description This command, combined with the disable mirror command below, allows you to enable or disable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session configuration. If the target port hasn't been set, enable mirror will not take effect. ...
Page 564: Disable Mirror
51. Mirror Commands 51.6. disable mirror  Description This command, combined with the enable mirror command above, allows you to enable or disable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session configuration.  Format disable mirror  Parameters None. ...
Page 565 51. Mirror Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display mirroring configuration: Zxxx0:admin#show mirror Command: show mirror Mirror Global State: Disabled Group State Target Port Source Ports ------- ---------- ------------- ---------------------------------------------- Enabled RX: 2-3 TX: 2-3 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 566: Mld Proxy Commands
52. MLD Proxy Commands 52.MLD Proxy Commands MLD (Multicast Listener Discovery) is a protocol to manage multicast groups in an IPv6 environment. It is a protocol equivalent to IGMP in IPv4. MLD proxy is a function to transfer MLD packets from multicast members to the upstream router.
Page 567 52. MLD Proxy Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the MLD proxy: Zxxx0:admin#enable mld_proxy Command: enable mld_proxy Success. Zxxx0:admin# 52.2. disable mld_proxy  Description This command is used to disable the MLD proxy on the Switching Hub. ...
Page 568 52. MLD Proxy Commands 52.3. config mld_proxy downstream_if  Description This command configures the MLD proxy downstream interfaces. The MLD proxy plays the server role on the downstream interfaces. The downstream interface must be an MLD Snooping enabled VLAN.  Format config mld_proxy downstream_if [add | delete] vlan [<vlan_name 32>...
Page 569 52. MLD Proxy Commands 52.4. config mld_proxy upstream_if  Description This command is used to configure the setting for the MLD proxy's upstream interface. The MLD proxy plays the host role on the upstream interface. It will send MLD report packets to the router port.
Page 570 52. MLD Proxy Commands Zxxx0:admin#config mld_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add 3 Command: config mld_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add 3 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 52.5. show mld_proxy  Description This command is used to display the MLD proxy's configuration or group information. The display status item means group entry is determined by whether or not the chip has been inserted.
Page 571 52. MLD Proxy Commands Zxxx0:admin#show mld_proxy Command: show mld_proxy MLD Proxy Global State : Enabled Upstream Interface VLAN ID Dynamic Router Ports : 1-4 Static Router Ports : 5-6 Unsolicited Report Interval : 10 Source IP Address : :: Downstream Interface VLAN List : 2-4 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 572: Mld Snooping Commands
53. MLD Snooping Commands 53.MLD Snooping Commands MLD (Multicast Listener Discovery) is a protocol to manage multicast groups in an IPv6 environment. It is a protocol equivalent to IGMP in IPv4. MLD snooping is a filtering function to monitor MLD packets flowing on ports of the Switching Hub and prevent data from flowing to unnecessary ports.
Page 573 53. MLD Snooping Commands config mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add | delete] <portlist> config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add | delete] <portlist> enable mld_snooping disable mld_snooping show mld_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list >]} show mld_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32>...
Page 574 53. MLD Snooping Commands fast_done Enable or disable the MLD snooping fast leave function. If enabled, the membership is immediately removed when the system receive the MLD leave message. enable Enable the MLD snooping fast leave function. disable Disable the MLD snooping fast leave function. proxy_reporting Specifies that the proxy reporting function will be configured.
Page 575 53. MLD Snooping Commands vlanid Specify a range of VLANs to be configured. <vlanid_list> Specify the VLAN ID list. <value 1-1000> Specify the rate limit of MLD control packet that the Switching Hub can process on a specific port/VLAN. The rate is specified in packet per second. The packet that exceeds the limited rate will be dropped.
Page 576 53. MLD Snooping Commands To display the MLD snooping packet rate limit for ports 1 to 2: Zxxx0:admin#show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1-2 Command: show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1-2 Port Rate Limit -------- ------------ No Limit No Limit Total Entries: 2 Zxxx0:admin# 53.4.
Page 577 53. MLD Snooping Commands Zxxx0:admin#create mld_snooping static_group vlan vlan1 FF1E::1 Command: create mld_snooping static_group vlan vlan1 FF1E::1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 53.5. config mld_snooping static_group  Description This command is used to configure an MLD snooping static group on the Switching Hub. When a port is configured as a static member port, the MLD protocol will not operate on this port.
Page 578 53. MLD Snooping Commands Zxxx0:admin#config mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1 delete 9-10 Command: config mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1 delete 9-10 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 53.6. delete mld_snooping static_group  Description This command is used to delete an MLD snooping static group on the Switching Hub. The deletion of an MLD snooping static group will not affect the MLD snooping dynamic member ports for a group.
Page 579 53. MLD Snooping Commands 53.7. show mld_snooping static_group  Description This command is used to display the MLD snooping static groups.  Format show mld_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>}  Parameters vlan (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides. <vlan_name 32>...
Page 580 53. MLD Snooping Commands 53.8. show mld_snooping statistic counter  Description This command is used to display the MLD snooping statistics counters for MLD protocol packets that are transmitted or received by the Switching Hub since MLD snooping was enabled. ...
Page 581 53. MLD Snooping Commands Zxxx0:admin#show mld_snooping statistic counter ports 1 Command: show mld_snooping statistic counter ports 1 Port # -------------------------------------------------- Group Number Receive Statistics Query MLD v1 Query MLD v2 Query Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Multicast VLAN Report &...
Page 582 53. MLD Snooping Commands 53.9. clear mld_snooping statistics counter  Description This command is used to clear the MLD snooping statistics counters.  Format clear mld_snooping statistics counter  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 583 53. MLD Snooping Commands  Parameters vlan_name Specify the name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured. <vlan_name 32> Specify the VLAN name. The maximum length is 32 characters. vlanid Specify the ID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured. <vlanid_list>...
Page 584 53. MLD Snooping Commands version Specify the version of MLD packet that will be sent by this port. If a MLD packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version, this packet will be forward from router ports or VLAN flooding. <value 1-2>...
Page 585 53. MLD Snooping Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To set up static router ports: Zxxx0:admin#config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1-10 Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1-10 Success.
Page 586 53. MLD Snooping Commands  Example To set up ports as forbidden router port: Zxxx0:admin#config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default add 1-10 Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default add 1-10 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 53.13. enable mld_snooping  Description This command is used to enable MLD snooping on the Switching Hub. ...
Page 587 53. MLD Snooping Commands 53.14. disable mld_snooping  Description This command is used to disable MLD snooping on the Switching Hub. MLD snooping can be disabled only if IPv6 multicast routing is not being used. Disabling MLD snooping allows all MLD and IPv6 multicast traffic to flood within a given IPv6 interface. ...
Page 588 53. MLD Snooping Commands vlanid (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which to view the MLD snooping configuration. <vlanid_list> Specify the VLAN ID list. If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current MLD snooping configurations. ...
Page 589 53. MLD Snooping Commands 53.16. show mld_snooping group  Description This command is used to display the current MLD snooping group information on the Switching Hub.  Format show mld_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>] {<ipv6addr>}} ...
Page 590 53. MLD Snooping Commands Zxxx0:admin#show mld_snooping group Command: show mld_snooping group Source/Group : 2001::1/FE1E::1 VLAN Name/VID :default/1 Member Ports : 1-2 UP Time : 26 Expiry Time : 258 Filter Mode : INCLUDE Source/Group : 2002::2/FE1E::1 VLAN Name/VID: : default/1 Member Ports UP Time : 29...
Page 591 53. MLD Snooping Commands forbidden (Optional) Display forbidden router ports that have been statically configured. If no parameter is specified, the system will display all router ports on the Switch.  Restrictions None.  Example To display router ports: Zxxx0:admin#show mld_snooping mrouter_ports all Command: show mld_snooping mrouter_ports all VLAN Name : default...
Page 592 53. MLD Snooping Commands vlanid (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which to view MLD snooping forwarding table information. <vlanid_list> Specify the VLAN ID list. If no parameter is specified, the system will display all currently configured MLD snooping forwarding entries. ...
Page 593: Login Banner And Prompt Commands
54. Login Banner and Prompt Commands 54.Login Banner and Prompt Commands These commands are used to change the command line interface (CLI) command prompt. config command_prompt [<string 16> | username | default] 54.1. config command_prompt  Description This command is used to modify the command prompt. The current command prompt consists of four parts: "product name"...
Page 594: Multicast Listener Discovery (Mld) Commands
55. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Commands 55.Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Commands In multicast where data is simultaneously sent to multiple destinations, destinations are managed in a unit called "group." Each group has its own unique multicast IP address and multicast MAC address assigned. A client that wants to join multicast can be a member of the group after sending a notification that it joins a specific multicast group to neighbor routers.
Page 595 55. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Commands max_response_time (Optional) Specifies the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners. <sec 1-25> Enter the maximum response time value used here. The value must be between 1 and 25 seconds. The default value is 10 seconds. robustness_variable (Optional) Specifies the permitted packet loss that guarantees the MLD.
Page 596 55. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Commands To configure the MLD version to v1 on all IP interfaces: Zxxx0:admin# config mld all version 1 Command: config mld all version 1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# To configure the MLD last listener query interval to 10 seconds on all interfaces: Zxxx0:admin# config mld all last_listener_query_interval 10 Command: config mld all last_listener_query_interval 10 Success.
Page 597 55. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show mld Command: show mld MLD Interface Configurations MRT = Maximum Response Time, LLQI = Last Listener Query Interval Interface Version Query Robustness LLQI State ---------- ------ ------ ---- ---------- ----- -------- System Disabled Enabled Disabled...
Page 598 55. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Commands 55.3. show mld group  Description This command is used to display the MLD group member table.  Format show mld group {ipif <ipif_name 12> | group <ipv6addr>}  Parameters ipif (Optional) Specifies the IP interface name used for this configuration. <ipif_name 12>...
Page 599 55. Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show mld group ipif n10 Command: show mld group ipif n10 Interface Multicast Group Expiry ------------ ------------------ ----- FF1E::1001:1234 FF1E::5A3D:11:23C1 Total Entries : 2 Zxxx0:admin# To display the group source address list for interface "n10" with the group address "FF1E::100:0:20", the "Expiry"...
Page 600: Network Load Balancing (Nlb) Commands
56. Network Load Balancing (NLB) Commands 56.Network Load Balancing (NLB) Commands NLB is a load balancing function in Windows Server. It assigns the same virtual IP address to multiple servers providing the same services and uniformly distributes accesses from the clients. NLB has the unicast mode and multicast mode.
Page 601 56. Network Load Balancing (NLB) Commands <macaddr> Specifies the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To create a NLB multicast FDB entry: Zxxx0:admin# create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 Command: create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 Success.
Page 602 56. Network Load Balancing (NLB) Commands Zxxx0:admin# delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 Command: delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 56.3. config nlb multicast_fdb  Description This command is used to configure the Switch's NLB multicast FDB entry.  Format config nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32>...
Page 603: Show Nlb Fdb
56. Network Load Balancing (NLB) Commands 56.4. show nlb fdb  Description This command is used to show the NLB configured entry.  Format show nlb fdb  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the NLB forwarding table: Zxxx0:admin# show nlb fdb Command: show nlb fdb MAC Address...
Page 604: Network Management Commands
57. Network Management Commands 57.Network Management Commands SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol to monitor and manage network-connected devices via network. Target devices have a management information database called MIB (Management Information Base). SNMP monitors and controls them through access to their MIBs using an external management manager.
Page 605: Disable Snmp
57. Network Management Commands  Format enable snmp  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable SNMP: Zxxx0:admin#enable snmp Command: enable snmp Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.2. disable snmp  Description This command is used to disable the SNMP function. When SNMP function is disabled, the network manager will not be able to access SNMP MIB objects.
Page 606 57. Network Management Commands Zxxx0:admin#disable snmp Command: disable snmp Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.3. create trusted_host  Description This command is used to create the trusted host. The Switching Hub allows you to specify up to twenty IP addresses (or IP ranges) that are allowed to manage the Switching Hub via in-band SNMP or Telnet based management software.
Page 607 57. Network Management Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To create a trusted host: Zxxx0:admin#create trusted_host 10.48.74.121 Command: create trusted_host 10.48.74.121 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.4. config trusted_host  Description This command is used to configure the access interfaces for the trusted host. ...
Page 608 57. Network Management Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the trusted host: Zxxx0:admin#config trusted_host 10.48.74.121 add ssh telnet Command: config trusted_host 10.48.74.121 add ssh telnet Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.5. delete trusted_host ...
Page 609 57. Network Management Commands  Example To delete a trusted host: Zxxx0:admin#delete trusted_host ipaddr 10.48.74.121 Command: delete trusted_host ipaddr 10.48.74.121 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.6. show trusted_host  Description This command is used to display the trusted hosts.  Format show trusted_host ...
Page 610 57. Network Management Commands 57.7. config snmp system_name  Description This command is used to configure the SNMP system name of the Switching Hub.  Format config snmp system_name <sw_name>  Parameters <sw_name> Specify an SNMP system name for the Switching Hub. A maximum of 255 characters is allowed.
Page 611 57. Network Management Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the Switching Hub location for "7F Server Room": Zxxx0:admin#config snmp system_location 7F Server Room Command: config snmp system_location 7F Server Room Success.
Page 612: Enable Snmp Traps
57. Network Management Commands 57.10. enable snmp traps  Description This command is used to enable SNMP trap support on the Switching Hub.  Format enable snmp traps  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 613 57. Network Management Commands  Example To prevent SNMP traps from being sent from the Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#disable snmp traps Command: disable snmp traps Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.12. enable snmp authenticate_traps  Description This command is used to enable SNMP authentication failure trap support. ...
Page 614 57. Network Management Commands 57.13. disable snmp authenticate_traps  Description This command is used to disable SNMP authentication failure trap support.  Format disable snmp authenticate_traps  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 615 57. Network Management Commands  Example To enable SNMP linkchange trap support: Zxxx0:admin#enable snmp linkchange_traps Command: enable snmp linkchange_traps Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.15. disable snmp linkchange_traps  Description This command is used to disable SNMP linkchange trap support.  Format disable snmp linkchange_traps ...
Page 616: Show Snmp Traps
57. Network Management Commands 57.16. config snmp linkchange_traps ports  Description This command is used to configure the sending of linkchange traps and per port control for sending of change traps.  Format config snmp linkchange_traps ports [all | <portlist>] [enable | disable] ...
Page 617 57. Network Management Commands ports (Optional) Specify a port or port range. <portlist> Specify a port or port range.  Restrictions None.  Example To display SNMP traps: Zxxx0:admin#show snmp traps Command: show snmp traps SNMP Traps : Enabled Authenticate Trap : Enabled Linkchange Traps : Enabled...
Page 618 57. Network Management Commands 57.18. config snmp coldstart_traps  Description This command is used to configure the trap state for coldstart events.  Format config snmp coldstart_traps [enable | disable]  Parameters enable Enable traps for coldstart events. The default state is enabled. disable Disable traps for coldstart events.
Page 619 57. Network Management Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable traps for warmstart events: Zxxx0:admin#config snmp warmstart_traps enable Command: config snmp warmstart_traps enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.20. config trap source_ipif  Description This command is used to force change the ipif information in trap messages.
Page 620 57. Network Management Commands To clear the configured trap source IP interface: Zxxx0:admin#config trap source_ipif none Command: config trap source_ipif none Success. Zxxx0:admin# 57.21. show trap source_ipif  Description This command is used to display the trap source IP interface. ...
Page 621: Config Rmon Trap
57. Network Management Commands 57.22. config rmon trap  Description This command is used to configure the trap state for RMON events.  Format config rmon trap {rising_alarm [enable | disable] | falling_alarm [enable | disable]}  Parameters rising_alarm (Optional) Specify the trap state for rising alarm. The default state is enabled. enable Enable the trap state for rising alarm.
Page 622: Show Rmon
57. Network Management Commands 57.23. show rmon  Description This command is used to display RMON related settings.  Format show rmon  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display current RMON settings: Zxxx0:admin#show rmon Command: show rmon RMON Rising Alarm Trap : Enabled RMON Falling Alarm Trap...
Page 623: Network Monitoring Commands
58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.Network Monitoring Commands The commands are used to display the following data for this Switching Hub's operation status.  Counting the amount of transmission packets and error information for each port  Displaying the current port usage, CPU usage, DRAM usage, and flash usage In addition, the following functions can be executed.
Page 624: Show Packet Ports
58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.1. show packet ports  Description This command is used to display statistics about the packets sent and received by the Switching Hub.  Format show packet ports <portlist>  Parameters <portlist>Specify a port or range of ports to be displayed. ...
Page 625: Show Error Ports
58. Network Monitoring Commands Zxxx0:admin#show packet ports 7 Command: show packet ports 7 Port number : 7 Frame Size/Type Frame Counts Frames/sec --------------- ---------------------- ----------- 65-127 128-255 256-511 512-1023 1024-1518 1519-1522 1519-2047 2048-4095 4096-9216 Unicast RX Multicast RX Broadcast RX CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n...
Page 626: Show Utilization
58. Network Monitoring Commands  Example To display the errors of port 3: Zxxx0:admin#show error ports 3 Command: show error ports 3 Port Number : 3 RX Frames TX Frames --------- --------- CRC Error Excessive Deferral Undersize CRC Error Oversize Late Collision Fragment Excessive Collision...
Page 627: Show Utilization Dram
58. Network Monitoring Commands Zxxx0:admin#show utilization ports Command: show utilization ports Port TX/sec RX/sec Util Port TX/sec RX/sec Util ------ ---------- ---------- ---- ------ ---------- ---------- ---- CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page Previous Page Refresh To display CPU utilization: Zxxx0:admin# show utilization cpu Command: show utilization cpu CPU utilization :...
Page 628: Show Utilization Flash
58. Network Monitoring Commands  Parameters unit Specifies which unit on the stacking system. If it is not specified, it refers to the master unit. <unit_id> Enter the unit ID used here.  Restrictions None.  Example To display DRAM utilization: Zxxx0:admin# show utilization dram Command: show utilization dram DRAM utilization :...
Page 629: Clear Counters
58. Network Monitoring Commands Zxxx0:admin# show utilization flash Command: show utilization flash FLASH Memory Utilization : Total FLASH : 30608 Used FLASH 4786 Utilization CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page Previous Page Refresh 58.6. clear counters  Description This command is used to clear the Switching Hub's statistics counters.
Page 630: Clear Log
58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.7. clear log  Description This command is used to clear the Switching Hub's history log.  Format clear log  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To clear the Switching Hub's history log: Zxxx0:admin#clear log Command: clear log...
Page 631 58. Network Monitoring Commands severity (Optional) Specify the severity level: emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notice, informational, or debug. module (Optional) Specify the modules to be displayed. The module can be obtained by the show log_software_module command. Use commas to separate multiple modules. <module_list>...
Page 632 58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.9. show log_save_timing  Description This command is used to display the method to save log.  Format show log_save_log_timing  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the method to save log: Zxxx0:admin#show log_save_timing Command: show log_save_timing Saving Log Method: On_demand...
Page 633 58. Network Monitoring Commands  Example To display the the protocols or applications that support the enhanced log: Zxxx0:admin#show log_software_module Command: show log_software_module DHCPv6_CLIENT DHCPv6_RELAY DHCPv6_SERVER ERROR_LOG MSTP OSPFV2 VRRP Zxxx0:admin# 58.11. config log_save_timing  Description This command is used to set the method to save log. ...
Page 634: Enable Syslog
58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.12. enable syslog  Description This command is used to globally enable syslog to send log messages to a remote server.  Format enable syslog  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 635: Show Syslog
58. Network Monitoring Commands  Example To disable syslog sending a message: Zxxx0:admin#disable syslog Command: disable syslog Success Zxxx0:admin# 58.14. show syslog  Description This command is used to display the syslog protocol global state.  Format show syslog  Parameters None.
Page 636: Config Syslog Host
58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.15. config syslog host  Description This command is used to configure the syslog host configuration.  Format config syslog host [<index> | all] {severity [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number>...
Page 637: Create Syslog Host
58. Network Monitoring Commands ipaddress Specify the IPv4 address or IPv6 address of the host. <ipaddr> Specify the IPv4 address of the host. <ipv6addr> Specify the IPv6 address of the host. state The syslog protocol has been used for the transmission of event notification messages across networks to host.
Page 638 58. Network Monitoring Commands ipaddress Specify the IPv4 address or IPv6 address of the host. <ipaddr> Specify the IPv4 address of the host. <ipv6addr> Specify the IPv6 address of the host. severity (Optional) Specify the severity level supported: emergency, alert, critical, error, warning, notice, informational, or debug.
Page 639: Delete Syslog Host
58. Network Monitoring Commands Zxxx0:admin# create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.1.1.1 Command: create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.1.1.1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 58.17. delete syslog host  Description This command is used to delete syslog host(s).  Format delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all] ...
Page 640: Show Syslog Host
58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.18. show syslog host  Description This command is used to display syslog host configurations.  Format show syslog host {<index 1-4>}  Parameters <index 1-4> (Optional) Specify the host index. If no parameter is specified, all hosts will be displayed. ...
Page 641 58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.19. config syslog source_ipif  Description This command is used to force change the ipif information in syslogs. By default, syslogs will carry the information of the ipif they belong to.  Format config syslog source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>} | none] ...
Page 642 58. Network Monitoring Commands 58.20. show syslog source_ipif  Description This command is used to display the syslog source IP interface.  Format show syslog source_ipif  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the syslog source interface: Zxxx0:admin#show syslog source_ipif Command: show syslog source_ipif Syslog Source IP Interface Configuration:...
Page 643 58. Network Monitoring Commands If no parameter is specified, all entries in the attack log will be displayed.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the Switching Hub's attack log: Zxxx0:admin#show attack_log index 1-3 Command: show attack_log index 1-3 Index Date Time Level Log Text...
Page 644 58. Network Monitoring Commands Zxxx0:admin#clear attack_log Command: clear attack_log Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 645: Open Shortest Path First (Ospf) Command List
59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List OSPF is a function to determine packet destinations dynamically. While RIP decides a route based on the number of routers passed through, OSPF determines an optimum route from the total number of cost values based on the route bandwidth.
Page 646 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List show ospf area {<area_id>} create ospf host_route <ipaddr> {area <area_id> | metric <value 1-65535>} config ospf host_route <ipaddr> {area <area_id> | metric <value 1-65535>}(1) delete ospf host_route <ipaddr> show ospf host_route {<ipaddr>} config ospf router_id <ipaddr>...
Page 647 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List hello_interval (Optional) Allows the specification of the interval between the transmission of OSPF Hello packets, in seconds. Between 1 and 65535 seconds can be specified. The Hello Interval, Dead Interval, Authorization Type, and Authorization Key should be the same for all routers on the same network.
Page 648 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To configure OSPF interface settings: Zxxx0:admin# config ospf ipif System priority 2 hello_interval 20 metric 2 state enabled Command: config ospf ipif System priority 2 hello_interval 20 metric 2 state enabled Success.
Page 649 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To create OSPF area aggregation settings: Zxxx0:admin# create ospf aggregation 10.1.1.1 192.168.0.0/16 lsdb_type summary Command: create ospf aggresgation 10.1.1.1 192.168.0.0/16 lsdb_type summary Success.
Page 650 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the OSPF area aggregation settings: Zxxx0:admin# config ospf aggregation 10.1.1.1 10.48.76.122/16 lsdb_type summary advertise enabled Command: config ospf aggregation 10.1.1.1 10.48.76.122/16 lsdb_type summary advertise enabled Success.
Page 651 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To delete an OSPF area aggregation settings: Zxxx0:admin# delete ospf aggregation 10.1.1.1 10.48.76.122/16 lsdb_type summary Command: delete ospf aggregation 10.1.1.1 10.48.76.122/16 lsdb_type summary Success. Zxxx0:admin# 59.5. show ospf aggregation  Description This command is used to display the current OSPF host route table.
Page 652 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.6. create ospf area  Description This command is used to create an OSPF area. OSPF allows collections of contiguous networks and hosts to be grouped together. Such a group, together with the routers having interfaces to any one of the included networks, is called an area.
Page 653 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To create an OSPF area: Zxxx0:admin# create ospf area 10.48.74.122 type stub stub_summary enabled metric 1 Command: create ospf area 10.48.74.122 type stub stub_summary enabled metric 1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 59.7. config ospf area ...
Page 654 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List metric (Optional) Specifies the metric (1 - 65535; 0 for auto cost) of this area. <value 0-65535> Enter the metric value used here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Page 655 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.9. show ospf area  Description This command is used to display an OSPF area's configuration.  Format show ospf area {<area_id>}  Parameters <area_id>(Optional) Enter the OSPF area ID used here. ...
Page 656 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.10. create ospf host_route  Description This command is used to create an OSPF host route.  Format create ospf host_route <ipaddr> {area <area_id> | metric <value 1-65535>}  Parameters <ipaddr>Enter the host's IP address used here. area (Optional) Specifies a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the OSPF domain.
Page 657 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Parameters <ipaddr>Enter the host's IP address used here. area (Optional) Specifies a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the OSPF domain. <area_id>...
Page 658 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To delete an OSPF host route: Zxxx0:admin# delete ospf host_route 10.48.74.122 Command: delete ospf host_route 10.48.74.122 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 59.13. show ospf host_route  Description This command is used to display the current OSPF host route table. ...
Page 659 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.14. config ospf router_id  Description The command is used to configure the router ID for the Switching Hub. Each Switching Hub that is configured to run OSPF must have a unique router ID. ...
Page 660 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List <neighbor_id> Specifies the OSPF router ID for the remote area. This is a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the remote area's Area Border Router. This is the router ID of the neighbor router. hello_interval (Optional) Allows the specification of the interval between the transmission of OSPF Hello packets, in seconds.
Page 661 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.16. config ospf virtual_link  Description This command is used to configure the OSPF virtual link.  Format config ospf virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | authentication [none | simple <password 8>]} ...
Page 662 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To configure the OSPF virtual link: Zxxx0:admin# config ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.2 20.1.1.1 hello_interval 10 Command: config ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.2 20.1.1.1 hello_interval 10 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 59.17. delete ospf virtual_link  Description This command is used to delete an OSPF virtual link.
Page 663 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.18. show ospf virtual_link  Description This command is used to display the current OSPF virtual interface configuration.  Format show ospf virtual_link {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}  Parameters <area_id>(Optional) Specifies a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the OSPF domain.
Page 664: Enable Ospf
59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.19. enable ospf  Description This command is used to enable OSPF on the Switching Hub.  Format enable ospf  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 665 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Restrictions None.  Example To display the current OSPF state: Zxxx0:admin# show ospf Command: show ospf OSPF Router ID : 10.90.90.90 (Auto selected) State : Enabled OSPF Interface Settings Interface IP Address Area ID State Link...
Page 666 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List OSPF Area Aggregation Settings Area ID Aggregated LSDB Advertise Network Address Type --------------- ------------------ -------- --------- 10.0.0.2 10.0.0.0/8 Summary Enabled Total Entries : 1 OSPF Host Route Settings Host Address Metric Area ID --------------- ------ --------------- 10.90.91.90 0.0.0.0...
Page 667 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List 59.22. show ospf lsdb  Description This command is used to display the OSPF Link State Database (LSDB).  Format show ospf lsdb {area <area_id> | advertise_router <ipaddr> | type [rtrlink | netlink | summary | assummary | asextlink | nssa_ext | stub]} ...
Page 668 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To display the link state database of OSPF: Zxxx0:admin# show ospf lsdb Command: show ospf lsdb Area ID LSDB Advertising Link State Cost Sequence Type Router ID Number ------------- ---------- ------------ ------------ ----...
Page 669 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To display OSPF neighbor information: Zxxx0:admin# show ospf neighbor Command: show ospf neighbor IP Address of Router ID of Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor Priority State --------------- --------------- -------- ------------- 10.48.74.122 10.2.2.2 Initial Total Entries : 1...
Page 670 59. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Command List  Example To display OSPF virtual-link neighbor information: Zxxx0:admin# show ospf virtual_neighbor Command: show ospf virtual_neighbor Transit Router ID of IP Address of Virtual Neighbor Area ID Virtual Neighbor Virtual Neighbor State --------------- ---------------- ----------------...
Page 671: Ospfv3 Commands
60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.OSPFv3 Commands OSPFv3 is an OSPF protocol for IPv6. It has almost the same functions as OSPF for IPv4 does. OSPF and OSPFv3 can be used simultaneously. enable ospfv3 disable ospfv3 show ospfv3 {[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all]} config ospfv3 router_id <ipaddr>...
Page 672 60. OSPFv3 Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable OSPFv3: Zxxx0:admin# enable ospfv3 Command: enable ospfv3 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 60.2. disable ospfv3  Description This command is used to disable OSPFv3 on the Switch. ...
Page 673 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.3. show ospfv3  Description This command is used to display the OSPFv3 configurations or OSPFv3 interfaces information.  Format show ospfv3 {[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all]}  Parameters ipif (Optional) Specifies the OSPFv3 IP interface name used. <ipif_name 12>...
Page 674 60. OSPFv3 Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 Command: show ospfv3 OSPFv3 Router ID: 1.1.1.1 State : Enabled OSPFv3 Interface Settings Interface Area ID State Link Metric Instance ID Status ------------ --------------- -------- --------- --------- ----------- System 0.0.0.0 Disabled Link Up Total Entries: 1 OSPFv3 Area Settings Area ID Type...
Page 675 60. OSPFv3 Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 all Command: show ospfv3 all Interface Name: System Link Local Address: FE80::201:2FF:FE03:400 (Link Up) Network Medium Type: BROADCAST Metric: 10 Area ID: 0.0.0.0 Administrative State: Disabled Priority: 1 DR State: DOWN DR ID: None Backup DR ID: None Hello Interval: 10 Dead Interval: 40...
Page 676 60. OSPFv3 Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To set OSPFv3 router ID: Zxxx0:admin# config ospfv3 router_id 1.1.1.1 Command: config ospfv3 router_id 1.1.1.1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 60.5. create ospfv3 area  Description This command is used to create an OSPFv3 area.
Page 677 60. OSPFv3 Commands  Example To create OSPFv3 areas: Zxxx0:admin# create ospfv3 area 1.1.1.1 type normal Command: create ospfv3 area 1.1.1.1 type normal Success. Zxxx0:admin# create ospfv3 area 2.2.2.2 type stub stub_summary enable Command: create ospfv3 area 2.2.2.2 type stub stub_summary enable Success.
Page 678 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.7. config ospfv3 area  Description This command is used to configure an OSPFv3 area. The backbone area (0.0.0.0) can not be configured to be stub area.  Format config ospfv3 area <area_id> type [normal | stub {stub_summary [enable | disable] | metric <value 0-65535>}] ...
Page 679 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.8. show ospfv3 area  Description This command is used to display OSPFv3 area configurations or information.  Format show ospfv3 area {<area_id>}  Parameters <area_id>(Optional) Specifies the OSPFv3 area's ID. It is a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
Page 680 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.9. create ospfv3 aggregation  Description This command is used to create an OSPFv3 area aggregation.  Format create ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr> advertise [enable | disable]  Parameters <area_id>Specifies the OSPFv3 area's ID. It is a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
Page 681 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.10. delete ospfv3 aggregation  Description This command is used to delete an OSPFv3 area aggregation.  Format delete ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr>  Parameters <area_id>Specifies the OSPFv3 area's ID. It is a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
Page 682 60. OSPFv3 Commands advertiseSpecifies whether the OSPFv3 ABR will use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-area routes or not. enable Specifies that the OSPFv3 ABR will use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-area routes when it advertises these routes to another area. disable Specifies that the OSPFv3 ABR will not use this aggregation to aggregate the intra- area routes when it advertises these routes to another area.
Page 683 60. OSPFv3 Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 aggregation Command: show ospfv3 aggregation OSPFv3 Area Aggregation Settings Area ID Aggregated LSDB Advertise Network Address Type --------------- ------------------------------------------- -------- --------- 1.1.1.1 1000::/16 Summary Disabled 2.2.2.2 2000::/16 Summary Disabled Total Entries: 2 Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 Command: show ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 OSPFv3 Area Aggregation Settings Area ID...
Page 684 60. OSPFv3 Commands type (Optional) Specifies that only this type of LSAs will be displayed and detail information for these LSAs will be displayed at the same time. rtrlinkSpecifies that the Router LSA will be displayed. netlink Specifies that the Network LSA will be displayed. inter_area_prefix Specifies that the Inter-Area-Prefix LSA will be displayed.
Page 685 60. OSPFv3 Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 lsdb Command: show ospfv3 lsdb Router LSA (Area 0.0.0.0) Link State ID ADV Router Seq# Link 0.0.0.0 2.2.2.2 0x80000003 Link LSA (Interface System) Link State ID ADV Router Seq# Prefix 0.0.0.1 2.2.2.2 0x80000003 Intra-Area-Prefix LSA (Area 0.0.0.0) Link State ID ADV Router Seq#...
Page 686 60. OSPFv3 Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To display OSPFv3 neighbor: Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 neighbor Command: show ospfv3 neighbor Router ID of Interface Neighbor Neighbor Neighbor Name Priority State --------------- ------------ -------- ------------- 10.10.10.10 System...
Page 687 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.15. show ospfv3 virtual_neighbor  Description This command is used to display OSPFv3 virtual neighbor information.  Format show ospfv3 virtual_neighbor {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}  Parameters <area_id> (Optional) Specifies the transit area where the virtual neighbor is built. <neighbor_id>...
Page 688 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.16. config ospfv3  Description This command is used to configure an OSPFv3 interface.  Format config ospfv3 [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {area <area_id> | priority <value 0-255> | hello_interval <sec 1-65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | instance <value 0-255> | metric <value 1-65535>| state [enable | disable] | passive [enable | disable]} ...
Page 689 60. OSPFv3 Commands state (Optional) Specifies to enable or disable this interface to run OSPFv3. enable Specifies that the OSPFv3 state, for this interface, will be enabled. disable Specifies that the OSPFv3 state, for this interface, will be disabled. passive (Optional) Specifies that the user may select Active or Passive for this OSPFv3 interface. Active interfaces actively advertise OSPFv3 to routers on other Intranets that are not part of this specific OSPFv3 group.
Page 690 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.17. create ospfv3 virtual_link  Description This command is used to create an OSPFv3 virtual link.  Format create ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | instance <value 0-255>}  Parameters <area_id>Specifies a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
Page 691 60. OSPFv3 Commands Zxxx0:admin# create ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 Command: create ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 60.18. config ospfv3 virtual_link  Description This command is used to configure an OSPFv3 virtual link.  Format config ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535>...
Page 692 60. OSPFv3 Commands  Example To configure an OSPFv3 virtual link: Zxxx0:admin# config ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 hello_interval 20 dead_interval 80 instance 1 Command: config ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 hello_interval 20 dead_interval 80 instance 1 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 60.19. delete ospfv3 virtual_link ...
Page 693 60. OSPFv3 Commands 60.20. show ospfv3 virtual_link  Description This command is used to display OSPFv3 virtual link configurations. If no parameters are set, all the virtual links will be displayed.  Format show ospfv3 virtual_link {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}  Parameters <area_id>(Optional) Specifies a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
Page 694 60. OSPFv3 Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 virtual_link Command: show ospfv3 virtual_link Virtual Interface Configuration Transit Virtual Hello Dead Instance ID Link Area ID Neighbor Router Interval Interval Status --------------- --------------- -------- -------- ----------- ------ 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 DOWN 1.1.1.1 70.70.70.70 DOWN Total Entries: 2 Zxxx0:admin# show ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 Command: show ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60...
Page 695: Packet Storm Commands
61. Packet Storm Commands 61.Packet Storm Commands A packet storm is a phenomenon where packets overflow on the network. It occurs when a large amount of broadcast or multicast data is sent simultaneously or a network device fails. A packet storm decreases network efficiency, interfering with normal communications.
Page 696: Config Traffic Control
61. Packet Storm Commands 61.1. config traffic control  Description This command is used to configure broadcast/multicast/unicast storm control. The broadcast storm control commands provide a hardware storm control mechanism only. These packet storm control commands include hardware and software mechanisms to provide shutdown, recovery, and trap notification functions.
Page 697 61. Packet Storm Commands countdown The timer for shutdown mode. When a port enters a shutdown RX state, and if this times out, the port will shut down the port forever. The default is 0 minutes. <min 0> Zero is the disable forever state. <min 3-30>...
Page 698 61. Packet Storm Commands  Parameters <min 0> Enter the automatic recovery time used here. This value will specifies the time to be 0 otherwise known as 'no recovery mode'. <min 1-65535> Enter the automatic recovery time used here. This value must be between 1 and 65535 minutes.
Page 699 61. Packet Storm Commands  Example To configure the traffic log state on the Switch: Zxxx0:admin# config traffic control log state enable Command: config traffic control log state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 61.4. config traffic trap  Description This command is used to configure whether storm control notification will be generated or not while traffic storm events are detected by a SW traffic storm control mechanism.
Page 700: Show Traffic Control
61. Packet Storm Commands Zxxx0:admin#config traffic trap both Command: config traffic trap both Success. Zxxx0:admin# 61.5. show traffic control  Description This command is used to display current traffic control settings.  Format show traffic control {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Specify a range of ports to be shown. If no parameter is specified, the system will display all port packet storm control configurations.
Page 701: Protocol Independent Multicast (Pim) Commands
62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands Sending data simultaneously to multiple destinations is called "multicast" and used for music and video distribution. PIM (Protocol Independent Multicast routing) is one of multicast routing protocols. It uses unicast routing such as existing RIP or OSPF to control multicast route selection.
Page 702 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands config pim crp {holdtime <value 0-255> | priority <value 0-255> | wildcard_prefix_cnt [0 | 1]} create pim crp group <network_address> rp <ipif_name 12> delete pim crp group <network_address> show pim crp config pim last_hop_spt_switchover [never | immediately] show pim ipmroute create pim static_rp group <network_address>...
Page 703 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands state (Optional) Specifies to allow the PIM function to be disabled or enabled for the above IP interface. The default is disabled. enable Specifies that the PIM function will be enabled. disable Specifies that the PIM function will be disabled. mode (Optional) Specifies the multicast protocol mode used.
Page 704 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.2. enable pim  Description This command is used to enable PIM on the Switching Hub.  Format enable pim  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 705 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands  Example To disable PIM: Zxxx0:admin# disable pim Command: disable pim Success. Zxxx0:admin# 62.4. show pim neighbor  Description This command is used to display the current PIM neighbor router table.  Format show pim neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <network_address>} ...
Page 706 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show pim neighbor Command: show pim neighbor PIM Neighbor Address Table Interface Name Neighbor Address Expire Time --------------- ---------------- ----------- System 10.48.74.122 Total Entries : 1 Zxxx0:admin# 62.5. show pim  Description This command is used to display the current PIM configuration. ...
Page 707 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show pim Command: show pim PIM Global State : Enabled Last Hop SPT Switchover : Never Register Probe Time Register Suppression Time : 60 PIM Interface Table Designated Hello Interface IP Address Router Interval Interval Mode State ---------- ------------------ --------------- -------- -------- ----- --------...
Page 708 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.6. config pim cbsr  Description This command is used to set the priority, hash mask length, and bootstrap period of the candidate bootstrap (C-BSR) router per interface.  Format config pim cbsr [ipif <ipif_name 12> {priority [-1 | <value 0-255>]} | hash_masklen <value 0- 32>...
Page 709 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.7. show pim cbsr  Description This command is used to list the candidate bootstrap router related information.  Format show pim cbsr {ipif <ipif_name 12>}  Parameters ipif Specifies the IP interface used for this configuration. <ipif_name 12>...
Page 710 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.8. config pim crp  Description This command is used to set the candidate rendezvous point (RP) related parameters.  Format config pim crp {holdtime <value 0-255> | priority <value 0-255> | wildcard_prefix_cnt [0 | ...
Page 711 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.9. create pim crp group  Description This command is used to add a multicast group range into a C-RP serve list for PIM-SM.  Format create pim crp group <network_address> rp <ipif_name 12> ...
Page 712 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.10. delete pim crp group  Description This command is used to delete a multicast group range from the C-RP server list.  Format delete pim crp group <network_address>  Parameters group Specifies the multicast group address for this Switching Hub to be removed from being a Candidate RP.
Page 713 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To list all the candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) related information: Zxxx0:admin# show pim crp Command: show pim crp PIM Candidate-RP Table C-RP Holdtime : 150 C-RP Priority : 192 C-RP wildcard prefix count Group Interface...
Page 714 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands  Example Set the SPT-switchover mode to never: Zxxx0:admin# config pim last_hop_spt_switchover never Command: config pim last_hop_spt_switchover never Success. Zxxx0:admin# 62.13. show pim ipmroute  Description This command is used to list all the entries of multicast routing, includes (*,G), (S,G) and (S,G,rpt).
Page 715 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show pim ipmroute Command: show pim ipmroute PIM IP Multicast Route Table UA = Upstream AssertTimer AM = Assert Metric AMPref = Assert MetricPref = Assert RPTBit Group Address Source Address AMPref ARB Flag Type Mode ---------------- ----------------- ---- ---- ------ ---- ---- ------- ----...
Page 716 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands  Example To create a static RP: Zxxx0:admin# create pim static_rp group 239.1.1.0/24 rp 10.52.33.18 Command: create pim static_rp group 239.1.1.0/24 rp 10.52.33.18 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 62.15. delete pim static_rp group  Description This command is used to delete a static RP. ...
Page 717 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.16. show pim static_rp  Description This command is used to list all the static RP settings.  Format show pim static_rp  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To list all the static RP settings: Zxxx0:admin# show pim static_rp Command: show pim static_rp PIM Static RP Table...
Page 718 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To list all the RPset information: Zxxx0:admin# show pim rpset Command: show pim rpset PIM RP-Set Table Bootstrap Router: 10.54.71.9 RP-Set Group RP-Set Adress Holdtime Expired Time Type --------------- --------------- --------- ------------- -------...
Page 719 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To create an entry for a specific RP in which the checksum in the registered packet will include the data portion: Zxxx0:admin# create pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address 24.1.2.3 Command: create pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address 24.1.2.3 Success.
Page 720 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands Zxxx0:admin# delete pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address 10.54.71.9 Command: delete pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address 10.54.71.9 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 62.20. show pim register_checksum_include_data_rp_list  Description This command is used to list all the RPs of the registered checksum, including the data. ...
Page 721 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.21. config pim-ssm  Description This command is used to enable the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) service model in PIM- SM on the Switching Hub. The PIM-SSM function will take active only when SSM service model and PIM-SM state both enabled.
Page 722 62. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Commands 62.22. show pim-ssm  Description This command is used to list all PIM-SSM protocol related information.  Format show pim-ssm  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display PIM-SSM state and group range: Zxxx0:admin# show pim-ssm Command: show pim-ssm SSM Service Model State...
Page 723: Pim For Ipv6 Command List
63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.PIM for IPv6 Command List config pim6 [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {hello_interval <sec 0-18000> | triggered_hello_delay <sec 0-60> | propagation_delay <sec 0-32> | override_interval <sec 0-65> | jp_interval <sec 0- 18000> | dr_priority <uint 0-4294967294> | bsr_border [disable | enable] | stub_interface [disable | enable] | state [enable | disable]}(1) show pim6 {ipif <ipif_name 12>} config pim6 cbsr {ipif <ipif_name 12>...
Page 724 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Parameters ipif Specify to apply the configurations to this specific IP interface. <ipif_name 12> Enter the IP interface name. Specify to apply the configurations to all IP interfaces. hello_interval Specify the interval of issuing hello packets fo find neighboring routers. <sec 0-18000>...
Page 725 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List stub_interface Specify whether this interface is a stub interface. If this interface is a stub interface, no PIM6 packets are sent out to this interface, and any received PIM6 packets are ignored. disable Specify that the interface is not a stub interface. This is the default. enable Specify that the interface is a stub interface.
Page 726 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Example To show brief information for the PIM6 protocol related parameters on all interfaces: Zxxx0:admin#show pim6 Command: show pim6 PIM6 Global State : Disabled Last Hop SPT Switchover : Never Register Probe Interval : 5 sec Register Suppression Timeout : 60 sec Keepalive Period...
Page 727 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List Zxxx0:admin#show pim6 ipif System Command: show pim6 ipif System Interface name : System Interface Link-Local Address Interface Global Address PIM6 Mode : SM State : Enabled Designated Router Designated Router Priority Designated Router Priority Enabled : True Hello Interval : 60 sec Triggered Hello Interval...
Page 728 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List priority (Optional) Specify to set the C-BSR priority. <value 0-255> Enter the value between 0 and 255. The default value is 64. hash_masklen Specify the length in bits of the mask. This makes use of a hash function for the case where a group range has multiple RPs with the same priority.
Page 729 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List Zxxx0:admin#show pim6 cbsr Command: show pim6 cbsr PIM6 Candidate-BSR Information -------------------------------------- C-BSR Interface Name : System C-BSR Priority : 64 C-BSR Hash Mask Len : 126 Zxxx0:admin# 63.5. config pim6 crp  Description This command is used to configure the PIM6 C-RP related parameters. ...
Page 730 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List Zxxx0:admin#config pim6 crp rp System priority 60 interval 60 Command: config pim6 crp rp System priority 60 interval 60 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 63.6. create pim6 crp group  Description This command is used to add a multicast group range into a C-RP serve list. ...
Page 731 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.7. delete pim6 crp group  Description This command is used to delete a multicast group range from the C-RP serve list.  Format delete pim6 crp group <ipv6networkaddr>  Parameters <ipv6networkaddr> Specify the multicast group address range of the C-RP entry to be removed from C-RP serve list.
Page 732 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the PIM global state for an IPv6 network: Zxxx0:admin#enable pim6 Command: enable pim6 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 63.9. disable pim6  Description This command is used to disable the PIM global state for an IPv6 network.
Page 733 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.10. config pim6 last_hop_spt_switchover  Description This command is used to make the last hop router to decide whether to receive the multicast data from the shared tree or switch over to the shortest path tree (SPT). ...
Page 734 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Parameters ipif (Optional) Specify to the IPv6 interface name to be displayed. <ipif_name 12> Enter the IPv6 interface name.  Restrictions None.  Example To show the PIM6 neighbors: Zxxx0:admin#show pim6 neighbor Command: show pim6 neighbor PIM6 Neighbor Address Table Interface Neighbor Address...
Page 735 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Format show pim6 mroute {group <ipv6addr> {source <ipv6addr>}}  Parameters group (Optional) Specify the IPv6 multicast group address to be displayed. <ipv6addr> Enter the IPv6 address. source (Optional) Specify the IPv6 source address to be displayed. <ipv6addr>...
Page 736 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.13. show pim6 mroute star_g  Description This command is used to display the multicast routing information for (*, G) entries generated by PIM6.  Format show pim6 mroute star_g {group <ipv6addr> {ipif <ipif_name 12>}} ...
Page 737 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.14. show pim6 mroute s_g  Description This command is used to display the multicast routing information for (S, G) or (S, G, rpt) entries generated by PIM6.  Format show pim6 mroute s_g {rpt} {group <ipv6addr> source <ipv6addr> {ipif <ipif_name 12>}} ...
Page 738 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.15. create pim6 static_rp group  Description This command is used to create a static RP. In general, a static RP cannot override a dynamic RP. If override_dynamic is configured, the static RP will override any dynamically learned RP.
Page 739 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Parameters <ipv6networkaddr> Specify the multicast group network address for this static RP.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete a static RP: Zxxx0:admin#delete pim6 static_rp group FF02::11/64 Command: delete pim6 static_rp group FF02::11/64 Success.
Page 740 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.18. show pim6 crp  Description This command is used to display all candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) related information.  Format show pim6 crp  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To show C-RP information: Zxxx0:admin#show pim6 crp Command: show pim6 crp PIM6 Candidate-RP Table...
Page 741 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Restrictions None.  Example To show the static RP: Zxxx0:admin#show pim6 static_rp Command: show pim6 static_rp PIM6 Static RP Table ----------------------------------- Group : FF02::/64 RP Address : 3000::12 Override Dynamic : False Total Entries: 1 Zxxx0:admin# 63.20.
Page 742 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List Zxxx0:admin#show pim6 rpset Command: show pim6 rpset Bootstrap Router: 3120::110 PIM6 RP-Set Table --------------------------------------------- Group : FF3D::/64 RP Address : 3121::110 Hold Time : 210 sec Expired Time : 196 sec Type : Dynamic Group : FF3E::/64 RP Address...
Page 743 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Example To specify the Switching Hub calculates the register packet checksum including the data portion: Zxxx0:admin#config pim6 register_checksum_calculate include_data Command: config pim6 register_checksum_calculate include_data Success. Zxxx0:admin# 63.22. config pim6 register_probe_time  Description This command is used to configure the PIM6-SM register probe time. ...
Page 744 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List 63.23. config pim6 register_suppression_time  Description This command is used to configure the PIM6-SM register suppression time.  Format config pim6 register_suppression_time <sec 3-65535>  Parameters <sec 3-655535> Enter the period during which a PIM DR stops sending Register-encapsulated data to the RP after receiving a Register-Stop message.
Page 745 63. PIM for IPv6 Command List  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the multicast routing keepalive period to be 220 seconds: Zxxx0:admin#config pim6 keepalive_period 220 Command: config pim6 keepalive_period 220 Success.
Page 746: Policy Route Commands
64. Policy Route Commands 64.Policy Route Commands The commands are used to configure policy-based routing. In general routing, a route is selected according to metrics such as the number of routers passed through and the bandwidth. Meanwhile, policy-based routing allows to create an access profile and select a route for each access profile.
Page 747 64. Policy Route Commands 64.2. delete policy_route name  Description This command is used to delete a policy route.  Format delete policy_route name <policyroute_name 32>  Parameters <policyroute_name 32> The policy route name. The maximum length is 32 characters. ...
Page 748 64. Policy Route Commands  Format config policy_route name <policyroute_name 32> acl profile_id <value 1-6> access_id <value 1-256> nexthop <ipaddr> state [enable | disable]  Parameters <policyroute_name 32> The policy route name. The maximum length is 32 characters. acl profile_id The ACL profile ID.
Page 749 64. Policy Route Commands 64.4. show policy_route  Description This command is used to display the Switching Hub's current policy route rules.  Format show policy_route  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the Switching Hub's current policy route rules: Zxxx0:admin#show policy_route Command: show policy_route Policy Routing Table...
Page 750: Port Security Commands
65. Port Security Commands 65.Port Security Commands Port security is used to limit the number of MAC addresses learned in this Switching Hub to limit the number of terminals to be accessed. If the specified number of terminals to be accessed is exceeded, exceeded accesses are discarded.
Page 751 65. Port Security Commands  Format config port_security ports [<portlist> | all] [{admin_state [enable | disable] | max_learning_addr <max_lock_no 0-3328> | lock_address_mode [permanent | deleteontimeout | deleteonreset]}(1) | {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 0-3328> | no_limit]}]  Parameters <portlist>Specify a range of ports to be configured.
Page 752 65. Port Security Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure port security: Zxxx0:admin#config port_security ports 6 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 10 lock_address_mode permanent Command: config port_security ports 6 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 10 lock_address_mode permanent Success.
Page 753 65. Port Security Commands  Parameters <max_lock_no 1-3328> Specify the maximum number of MAC address entries that can be learned by the system. If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on all enabled ports, the command will be rejected. no_limit By default, the number above is set to no limit.
Page 754 65. Port Security Commands max_learning_addr Specify the maximum number of MAC address entries that can be learned with this VLAN. If this parameter is set to 0, it means that no user can get authorization on this VLAN. If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on the VLAN, the command will be rejected.
Page 755 65. Port Security Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete the port security entry with a MAC address of 00-01-30-10-2c-c7 on the default VLAN: Zxxx0:admin#delete port_security_entry vlan default mac_address 00-01-30-10-2C-C7 Command: delete port_security_entry vlan default mac_address 00-01-30-10-2C-C7 Success.
Page 756 65. Port Security Commands  Example To clear port security entry for port 6: Zxxx0:admin#clear port_security_entry port 6 Command: clear port_security_entry port 6 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 65.6. show port_security_entry  Description This command is used to display a port security entry. ...
Page 757 65. Port Security Commands  Example To display a port security entry: Zxxx0:admin#show port_security_entry Command: show port_security_entry MAC Address Port Lock Mode ----------------- ---- ---------- 00-00-00-00-00-01 DeleteOnTimeout Total Entry Number: 1 Zxxx0:admin# 65.7. show port_security  Description This command is used to display the port security related information of the Switching Hub ports including the port security admin state, the maximum number of learning addresses, and the lock mode.
Page 758 65. Port Security Commands  Example To display the global configuration of port security: Zxxx0:admin# show port_security Command: show port_security Port Security Trap/Log : Disabled System Maximum Address : 512 VLAN Configuration (Only VLANs with limitation are displayed) VLAN Name Max.
Page 759 65. Port Security Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable a port security trap: Zxxx0:admin#enable port_security trap_log Command: enable port_security trap_log Success. Zxxx0:admin# 65.9. disable port_security trap_log  Description This command is used to disable a port security trap/log.
Page 760: Power Saving Commands
66. Power Saving Commands 66.Power Saving Commands The commands are used to configure the power saving mode. If a port is not link up, the mode periodically repeats turning ON/OFF the power feed to the port to save more power consumption than when the power feed is always ON.
Page 761 66. Power Saving Commands  Parameters state (Optional) Configure the power saving state to enable or disable. The default value is enable. enable Enable the power saving feature. disable Disable the power saving feature. length_detection Configure the length detection state to enable or disable. The default value is disable. enable Enable the length detection feature.
Page 762 66. Power Saving Commands To display power saving information: Zxxx0:admin#show power_saving Command: show power_saving Power Saving State: Enabled Length Detection State: Enabled Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 763: Precision Time Protocol (Ptp) Commands
67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands 67.Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands PTP (Precision Time Protocol) is a technology to enable the time synchronization at an accuracy of 1 s or less. It allows for more highly accurate time synchronization than NTP (Network Time Protocol) on multicast network.
Page 764 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands show ptp boundary {ports [<portlist> | all]} show ptp p2p_transparent ports [<portlist> | all] show ptp foreign_master_records ports [<portlist> | all] 67.1. enable ptp  Description This command is used to enable the PTP function globally. The device will enter the P2P-transparent clock mode when the PTP global state is enabled.
Page 765 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To disable the PTP function globally: Zxxx0:admin# disable ptp Command: disable ptp Success. Zxxx0:admin# 67.3. config ptp mode ...
Page 766 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands p2p_transparent Specifies the Switch as a Peer-to-Peer Transparent Clock. e2e_transparent Specifies the Switch as an End-to-End Transparent Clock.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To specify the Switching Hub as a peer-to-peer transparent clock: Zxxx0:admin# config ptp mode p2p_transparent Command: config ptp mode p2p_transparent Success.
Page 767 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands 67.5. config ptp clock domain_number  Description This command is used to configure the PTP clock common attribute of the domain number. The domain number is used to identify the PTP domain that the PTP clock is working on.
Page 768 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands To configure the domain number of the PTP clock as 1 and assign a domain name of internal_domain for the unit 1, when the stacking mode is enabled. Zxxx0:admin#config ptp clock domain_number 1 unit 1 domain_name internal_domain Command: config ptp clock domain_number 1 unit 1 domain_name internal_domain Success.
Page 769 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands 67.7. config ptp ports  Description This command is used to configure the per port state of the PTP clock. PTP port active state should meet the following three conditions: • The global PTP state is enabled. •...
Page 770 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands 67.8. config ptp boundary ports  Description This command is used to configure the attributes of the PTP boundary clock. The configuration takes effect when the PTP device is a boundary type.  Format config ptp boundary ports [<portlist>...
Page 771 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands delay_req_interval (Optional) Specifies the permitted mean time interval between successive delay request messages which are sent by a slave to a specific port on the master. This mean time interval value is determined and advertised by a master. <value 0-5>...
Page 772 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# config ptp boundary ports all sync_interval 2 Command: config ptp boundary ports all sync_interval 2 Success. Zxxx0:admin# If the sync_interval is 0.5 seconds, then the delay_req_interval attribute of the all PTP ports is configured as 0. Zxxx0:admin# config ptp boundary ports all delay_req_interval 0 Command: config ptp boundary ports all delay_req_interval 0 Success.
Page 773 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands 67.9. config ptp p2p_transparent ports  Description This command is used to configure the pdelay_request message attribute for the message interval of the P2P transparent clock.  Format config ptp p2p_transparent ports [<portlist> | all] pdelay_req_interval <sec 1-32> ...
Page 774 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands 67.10. show ptp  Description This command is used to display the configured attributes of PTP on the Switching Hub.  Format show ptp  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To show the global PTP configuration: Zxxx0:admin# show ptp Command: show ptp PTP State Setting...
Page 775 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To show the active attributes of the boundary clock: Zxxx0:admin# show ptp clock Command: show ptp clock PTP State : Enabled PTP Clock Mode Boundary Clock PTP Transport Protocol PTP Clock Domain Number PTP Clock Domain Name internal_domain...
Page 776 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ptp clock Command: show ptp clock Box ID: 1 PTP State : Enabled PTP Clock Mode Boundary Clock PTP Transport Protocol PTP Clock Domain Number PTP Clock Domain Name internal_domain PTP Clock Identity ACDE4823456789AB PTP Priority 1 PTP Priority 2...
Page 777 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To show the active attributes of the boundary clock parent: Zxxx0:admin# show ptp clock parent Command: show ptp clock parent PTP Parent Port Identity ACDE48FFFE6789AB PTP Parent Port Number PTP Grandmaster Identity ACDE48FFFE9789AD PTP Grandmaster Clock Class...
Page 778 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ptp clock parent Command: show ptp clock parent Box ID: 1 PTP Parent Port Identity ACDE4823456789AB PTP Parent Port Number PTP Grandmaster Identity ACDE4823659789AD PTP Grandmaster Clock Class PTP Grandmaster Clock Accuracy 100ns PTP Grandmaster Priority 1 PTP Grandmaster Priority 2...
Page 779 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ptp ports 1:1-1:4 Command: show ptp ports 1:1-1:4 The active attributes: : Delay Mechanism : Announce Interval ART : Announce Receipt Timeout : Synchronization Interval DRIM: Delay_Request Interval-Master DRIS: Delay_Request Interval-Slave PDRI: Pdelay_Request Interval PMPD: Peer Mean Path Delay Port Role...
Page 780 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands 67.14. show ptp boundary  Description This command is used to display the configured attributes of the boundary clock or the configured attributes of the boundary clock's special ports.  Format show ptp boundary {ports [<portlist> | all]} ...
Page 781 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ptp boundary ports 1:1-1:4 Command: show ptp boundary ports 1:1-1:4 The attribute configurations of the ports of boundary: : Delay Mechanism : Announce Interval CART : The Coefficient of Announce Receipt Timeout : Synchronization Interval EDRI : The Exponent of Delay_Request Interval PDRI : Pdelay_Request Interval...
Page 782 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ptp p2p_transparent ports 1:1-1:4 Command: show ptp p2p_transparent ports 1:1-1:4 The attribute configuration of the p2p_transparent ports: PDRI : Pdelay_Request Interval Port PDRI State Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Zxxx0:admin# 67.16. show ptp foreign_master_records ports ...
Page 783 67. Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Commands Zxxx0:admin#show ptp foreign_master_records ports all Command: show ptp foreign_master_records ports all FM Port Identity : The clock identity of the Foreign Master Port FM Port Number : The port number of the Foreign Master Port FM Announce Messages : The numbers of Foreign Master announce messages Port...
Page 784: Protocol Vlan Commands
68. Protocol VLAN Commands 68.Protocol VLAN Commands Protocol VLAN is a function to determine a VLAN to which a port belongs based on protocol information written in the header of a receive packet. You can specify the frame type of Ethernet ver2, Sub Network Access Protocol (SNAP), or Link Logical Control (LLC) and map it to a VLAN.
Page 785 68. Protocol VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 4 group_name General_Group Command: create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 4 group_name General_Group Success. Zxxx0:admin# 68.2. config dot1v_protocol_group  Description This command is used to add a protocol to a protocol group. The selection of a protocol can be a pre-defined protocol type or a user defined protocol.
Page 786 68. Protocol VLAN Commands delete protocol Specify the protocol to be deleted. Depending on the frame type, the octet string will have one of the following values below. The form of the input is 0x0 to 0xffff. ethernet_2 This is a 16-bit (2-octet) hex value. Example: IPv4 is 800, IPv6 is 86dd, ARP is 806, etc.
Page 787 68. Protocol VLAN Commands 68.3. delete dot1v_protocol_group  Description This command is used to delete a protocol group.  Format delete dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <id> | group_name <name 32> | all]  Parameters group_idSpecify the group ID to be deleted. <id> Specify the group ID to be deleted. group_name Specify the name of the protocol group to be deleted.
Page 788 68. Protocol VLAN Commands  Parameters group_id(Optional) Specify the group ID to be displayed. <id> Specify the group ID to be displayed. group_name (Optional) Specify the name of the protocol group. <name 32> Specify the name of the protocol group. The maximum length is 32 characters. If no parameter is specified, all configured protocol groups will be displayed.
Page 789 68. Protocol VLAN Commands  Parameters <portlist>Specify a range of ports to apply this command. Specify all ports. add protocol_group Specify to add a protocol group. group_id Specify the group ID of the protocol group. <id> Specify the group ID of the protocol group. group_name Specify the name of the protocol group.
Page 790: Show Port Dot1V
68. Protocol VLAN Commands 68.6. show port dot1v  Description This command is used to display the VLAN to be associated with untagged packets ingressed from a port based on the protocol group.  Format show port dot1v {ports <portlist>} ...
Page 791: Qos Commands
69. QoS Commands 69.QoS Commands QoS (Quality of Service) is a function to allocate the optimum bandwidth according to the communication purpose to secure response time and throughput required for each communication. It performs communication priority control based on the priority tag (priority information) added to the header of a receive packet.
Page 792 69. QoS Commands config bandwidth_control [<portlist> | all] {rx_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>] | tx_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>]}(1) show bandwidth_control {<portlist>} config per_queue bandwidth_control {ports [<portlist> | all]} <cos_id_list 0-7> {{min_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>]} max_rate [no_limit | <value 64-10240000>]}(1) show per_queue bandwidth_control {<portlist>} config scheduling {ports [<portlist>...
Page 793 69. QoS Commands tx_rate (Optional) Specify the limitation of transmit data rate. no_limit Specify to indicate there is no limit on port tx bandwidth. <value 64-10240000> Specify an integer value from 64 to 10240000 to set a maximum limit in Kbits/sec. The specified bandwidth limit may be equaled but not exceeded.
Page 794 69. QoS Commands None.  Example To display the port bandwidth control table for ports 1 to 2: Zxxx0:admin#show bandwidth_control 1-2 Command: show bandwidth_control 1-2 Bandwidth Control Table Port RX Rate TX Rate Effective RX Effective TX (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) ---- ----------...
Page 795 69. QoS Commands min_rateSpecify that one of the parameters below will be applied to the minimum rate that the class specified above will be allowed to transmit packets at. no_limit Indicates there is no limit on egress queue of specified port bandwidth. <value 64-10240000>...
Page 796: Config Scheduling
69. QoS Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display the port bandwidth control table for port 1: Zxxx0:admin#show per_queue bandwidth_control 1 Command: show per_queue bandwidth_control 1 Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port: 1 Queue Min Rate(Kbit/sec) Max Rate(Kbit/sec) No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit...
Page 797 69. QoS Commands weight Specifies the weight value for weighted round robin. The queue will operate in WRR mode if the port mode is WRR. It will operate in strict mode if the port mode is strict. <value 1-127> Enter the weight value here. This value must be between 1 and 127. ...
Page 798: Show Scheduling
69. QoS Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue: Zxxx0:admin# config scheduling_mechanism strict Command: config scheduling_mechanism strict Success. Zxxx0:admin# To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for the CoS queue on port 1:1: Zxxx0:admin# config scheduling_mechanism ports 1:1 strict Command: config scheduling_mechanism ports 1:1 strict Success.
Page 799 69. QoS Commands Zxxx0:admin#show scheduling Command: show scheduling QOS Output Scheduling On Port: 1 Class ID Weight -------- ------ Class-0 Class-1 Class-2 Class-3 Class-4 Class-5 Class-6 Class-7 QOS Output Scheduling On Port: 2 Class ID Weight -------- ------ Class-0 Class-1 Class-2 Class-3 Class-4...
Page 800 69. QoS Commands 69.8. show scheduling_mechanism  Description This command is used to display the traffic scheduling mechanism.  Format show scheduling_mechanism {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Specifies a range of ports to be displayed.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the scheduling mechanism for all ports: Zxxx0:admin#show scheduling_mechanism Command: show scheduling_mechanism Port...
Page 801 69. QoS Commands Zxxx0:admin#show scheduling_mechanism 1-10 Command: show scheduling_mechanism 1-10 Port Mode ----- ------ Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Zxxx0:admin# 69.9. config 802.1p user_priority  Description This command is used to configure the way by which the Switching Hub will map an incoming packet, based on its 802.1p user priority, to one of the eight available hardware priority queues on the Switching Hub.
Page 802 69. QoS Commands  Parameters ports (Optional)Specifies that port used for this configuration. portlist Specifies the range of ports to be configured. Specifies that all the ports will be used for this configuration. <priority 0-7> Specify the 802.1p user priority to associate with the <class_id> (the number of the hardware queue).
Page 803 69. QoS Commands  Example To display the 802.1p user priority: Zxxx0:admin#show 802.1p user_priority Command: show 802.1p user_priority QoS Class of Traffic Port 1 Priority-0 -> <Class-2> Priority-1 -> <Class-0> Priority-2 -> <Class-1> Priority-3 -> <Class-3> Priority-4 -> <Class-4> Priority-5 ->...
Page 804 69. QoS Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure an 802.1p default priority settings of 5 on all Switch ports: Zxxx0:admin#config 802.1p default_priority all 5 Command: config 802.1p default_priority all 5 Success.
Page 805 69. QoS Commands Zxxx0:admin#show 802.1p default_priority 1-4 Command: show 802.1p default_priority 1-4 Port Priority Effective Priority ---- ----------- ------------------ Zxxx0:admin# 69.13. enable hol_prevention  Description This command is used to enable head of line prevention on the Switching Hub.  Format enable hol_prevention ...
Page 806 69. QoS Commands 69.14. disable hol_prevention  Description This command is used to disable head of line prevention on the Switching Hub.  Format disable hol_prevention  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 807: Config Dscp Map
69. QoS Commands  Example To display HOL prevention state on the Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#show hol_prevention Command: show hol_prevention Device HOL Prevention State: Enabled Zxxx0:admin# 69.16. config dscp map  Description This command is used to configure DSCP mapping. The mapping of DSCP to priority will be used to determine the priority of the packet (which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue) when the port is in DSCP trust state.
Page 808: Config Dscp Trust
69. QoS Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure the mapping of the DSCP priority to priority 1 on port 1:1 -1:8 : Zxxx0:admin#config dscp map 1-8 dscp_priority 1 to 1 Command: config dscp map 1-8 dscp_priority 1 to 1 Success.
Page 809: Show Dscp Map
69. QoS Commands Zxxx0:admin#config dscp trust 1-8 state enable Command: config dscp trust 1-8 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 69.18. show dscp map  Description This command is used to show DSCP trusted port list and mapped color, priority and DSCP. ...
Page 810: Show Dscp Trust
69. QoS Commands Zxxx0:admin# show dscp map 1 dscp_priority Command: show dscp map 1 dscp_priority DSCP to 802.1p Priority Mapping: Port 1 DSCP 0,2-7 is mapped to 0 DSCP 1,8-15 is mapped to 1 DSCP 16-23 is mapped to 2 DSCP 24-31 is mapped to 3 DSCP 32-39 is mapped to 4 DSCP 40-47 is mapped to 5...
Page 811 69. QoS Commands  Restrictions None.  Example Display DSCP trust status on ports 1:1-1:8. Zxxx0:admin# show dscp trust 1-8 Command: show dscp trust 1-8 Port DSCP-Trust ---- ---------- Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 812 69. QoS Commands...
Page 813: Ring Redundant Protocol (Rrp) Commands
70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands 70.Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) realizes to make a redundant network via ring topology to recover the communication failure quickly, when the device or link failure is happened. One ring topology unit is called “domain”, RRP controller is called “Master node”, and the other RRP members are called “Transit node”.
Page 814 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands 70.1. config rrp domain  Description This command is used to configure the RRP domain.  Format config rrp domain <domain name> [type {master|transit}] [control_vlan_id <vid>] [data_vlan_id <vid list>] [primary_port <port num>] [secondary_port <port num>] [polling_interval <1-2sec>] [fail_period <2-5sec>] [ring_guard_port {primary|secondary|both|disable}] ...
Page 815 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands fail_period Specify the fail period time to detect communication failure. The factory default is 2 sec. <2-5 sec> Specify the time between 2 and 5 seconds. polling_interval and fail_period are not allowed to set the same value. ring_guard_port （Option）Specify the ring guard function state.
Page 816 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands  Parameters <domain name> Specify the domain name of the RRP domain with 1-25 characters. type Specify the RRP node type. master Specify the RRP node as Master. The Master node must be existed only one in domain.
Page 817 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To crete the “pc-ring” domain settings to node type=Transit, control VLAN=30, primary port=9, secondary port=10, data VLAN=1, polling interval=1, and fail period=2: Zxxx0:admin# create rrp domain pc-ring type transit control_vlan_id 30 primary_port 9 secondary_port 10 data_vlan_id 1 polling_interval 1 fail_period 2 Command: create rrp domain pc-ring type transit control_vlan_id 30 primary_port 9...
Page 818 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands 70.4. disable rrp  Description This command used to disable the global RRP function state. The factory default is disable.  Format disable rrp  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command. ...
Page 819 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands  Example To disable “pc-ring” domain state: Zxxx0:admin# disable rrp domain pc-ring Command: disable rrp domain pc-ring Success. Zxxx0:admin# 70.6. enable rrp  Description This command used to enable the global RRP function state. The factory default is disable. ...
Page 820 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands  Parameters <domain name> Specify the RRP domain name to enable.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the “pc-ring” domain state: Zxxx0:admin# enable rrp domain pc-ring Command: enable rrp domain pc-ring Success.
Page 821 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands  Example To display the RRP settings: Zxxx0:admin# show rrp Command: show rrp RRP Status : Enabled Total Domain Number(s) : 1 Domain Name Ctrl VLAN Data VLAN(s) Ring Status ------------ ---------- --------------------------------------- ----------- pc-ring Link-Up Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 822 70. Ring Redundant Protocol (RRP) Commands  Example To display“pc-ring” domain settings: Zxxx0:admin# show rrp status pc-ring Command: show rrp status pc-ring RRP Domain Name : pc-ring RRP Domain Status : Enabled RRP Node Type : Transit RRP Ring Status : Link-Up Primary Port : 10...
Page 823: Routing Information Protocol (Rip) Command List
71. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List 71.Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List RIP is a function to determine packet destinations dynamically. RIP exchanges routing tables with adjacent routers and determines a route based on the number of routers (hops) passed through to reach the destination.
Page 824 71. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable RIP: Zxxx0:admin# enable rip Command: enable rip Success. Zxxx0:admin# 71.2. config rip  Description This command is used to configure the RIP settings for one or more IP interfaces.
Page 825 71. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List tx_mode(Optional) Specifies the RIP transmission mode. disable Specifies to prevent the transmission of RIP packets. v1_only Specifies that only RIP version 1 format packets will be transmitted. v1_compatible Specifies to transmit RIP version 2 format packets to the broadcast address. v2_only Specifies that only RIP version 2 format packets will be transmitted.
Page 826 71. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List 71.3. config rip timers  Description This command is used to configure RIP timers.  Format config rip timers {update <sec 5-65535> | timeout <sec 5-65535> | garbage_collection <sec 5-65535>}  Parameters update (Optional) Specifies the value of the rate at which RIP updates are sent. <sec 5-65535>...
Page 827 71. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List 71.4. disable rip  Description This command is used to disable RIP for the Switching Hub.  Format disable rip  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 828 71. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List  Restrictions None.  Example To display RIP configuration and statistics for all IP interface. Zxxx0:admin#show rip Command: show rip RIP Global State : Enabled Update Time : 120 seconds Timeout Time : 300 seconds Garbage Collection Time : 150 seconds RIP Interface Settings...
Page 829: Rspan Commands
72. RSPAN Commands 72.RSPAN Commands RSPAN (Remote Switched Port Analyzer) is a function to mirror receive packets to other Switching Hubs. You need to configure the RSPAN VLAN source setting on the packet source (source Switching Hub) and the RSPAN VLAN redirect setting on a Switching Hub which relays mirror packets.
Page 830: Enable Rspan
72. RSPAN Commands 72.1. enable rspan  Description This command is used to enable RSPAN globally.  Format enable rspan  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable RSPAN globally: Zxxx0:admin#enable rspan Command: enable rspan Success.
Page 831: Create Rspan Vlan
72. RSPAN Commands  Example To disable the RSPAN globally: Zxxx0:admin#disable rspan Command: disable rspan Success. Zxxx0:admin# 72.3. create rspan vlan  Description This command is used to create an RSPAN VLAN. Up to 16 RSPAN VLANs can be created. ...
Page 832: Delete Rspan Vlan
72. RSPAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#create rspan vlan vlan_id 3 Command: create rspan vlan vlan_id 3 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 72.4. delete rspan vlan  Description This command is used to delete an RSPAN VLAN.  Format delete rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] ...
Page 833: Config Rspan Vlan
72. RSPAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3 Command: delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 72.5. config rspan vlan  Description This command is used by the source Switching Hub to configure the source setting for the RSPAN VLAN. The redirect command is used by the intermediate or last Switching Hub to configure the output port of the RSPAN VLAN packets, and makes sure that the RSPAN VLAN packets can egress to the redirect ports.
Page 834 72. RSPAN Commands source If the ports are not specified by this command, the source of RSPAN will come from the source specified by the mirror command or the flow-based source specified by an ACL. If no parameter is specified for source, it deletes the configured source parameters. mirror_group_id The mirror group identify that specify which mirror session used for RSPAN source function.
Page 835: Show Rspan
72. RSPAN Commands 72.6. show rspan  Description This command is used to display RSPAN configuration.  Format show rspan {[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]}  Parameters vlan_name Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name. <vlan_name> Specify the VLAN name. vlan_id Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
Page 836 72. RSPAN Commands Zxxx0:admin# show rspan Command: show rspan RSPAN: Enabled RSPAN VLAN ID: 1 -------------------- Mirror Group ID Target Port : 1:1 Source Ports RSPAN VLAN ID: 2 -------------------- Redirect Ports : 1:6-1:10 RSPAN VLAN ID: 3 ---------------------- Redirect Ports : 1:6-1:10 Total RSPAN VLAN :3 Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 837: Snmpv1/V2/V3 Commands
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a protocol to monitor and manage network-connected devices via network. Target devices have a management information database called MIB (Management Information Base). SNMP monitors and controls them through access to their MIBs using an external management manager.
Page 838: Create Snmp User
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.1. create snmp user  Description This command is used to create a new user to an SNMP group originated by this command. Users can choose input authentication and privacy by password or by key.  Format create snmp user <user_name 32>...
Page 839 73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Page 840: Delete Snmp User
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands  Example To create a new user to an SNMP group originated by this command: Zxxx0:admin#create snmp user manager MANAGER_group encrypted by_password auth sha 12345678 priv des 12345678 Command: create snmp user manager MANAGER_group encrypted by_password auth sha 12345678 priv des 12345678 Success.
Page 841: Show Snmp User
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.3. show snmp user  Description This command is used to display information on each SNMP username in the group username table.  Format show snmp user  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display SNMP user information: Zxxx0:admin#show snmp user Command: show snmp user Username...
Page 842: Create Snmp View
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display the names of the SNMP groups on the Switching Hub: Zxxx0:admin#show snmp groups Command: show snmp groups Vacm Access Table Settings Group Name : public ReadView Name : CommunityView WriteView Name Notify View Name : CommunityView Security Model : SNMPv1...
Page 843: Delete Snmp View
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands  Parameters <view_name 32> Specify the view name to be created. <oid> Specify the object-identified tree (the MIB tree). view_type Specify the access type of of the MIB tree in this view. included Specify to include this view. excludedSpecify to exclude this view.
Page 844: Show Snmp View
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands  Example To remove a view record: Zxxx0:admin#delete snmp view managerview all Command: delete snmp view managerview all Success. Zxxx0:admin# 73.7. show snmp view  Description This command is used to display SNMP view records.  Format show snmp view {<view_name 32>} ...
Page 845: Create Snmp Community
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.8. create snmp community  Description This command is used to create an SNMP community string. Use an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and the agent. The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switching Hub. You can specify one or more of the following characteristics associated with the string: A MIB view, which defines the subset of all MIB objects accessible to the given community;...
Page 846: Delete Snmp Community
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.9. delete snmp community  Description This command is used to remove a specific community string.  Format delete snmp community <community_string 32>  Parameters <community_string 32> Specify the community string that will be deleted.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Page 847 73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands If a community string is not specified, all community string information will be displayed.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the current community string configurations: Zxxx0:admin#show snmp community Command: show snmp community SNMP Community Table Community Name View Name Access Right ----------------------------...
Page 848: Config Snmp Engineid
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To create an SNMP community string called "community123" with the "read_only" security method: Zxxx0:admin# create snmp community_masking view CommunityView read_only Command: create snmp community_masking view CommunityView read_only Enter a case-sensitive community:************ Enter the community again for confirmation:************ Success.
Page 849: Show Snmp Engineid
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.13. show snmp engineID  Description This command is used to display the identification of the SNMP engine on the Switching Hub.  Format show snmp engineID  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the identification of an SNMP engine: Zxxx0:admin#show snmp engineID Command: show snmp engineID SNMP Engine ID : 1023457890...
Page 850: Delete Snmp Group
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands Specify the most secure of the possible security models. Specifies authentication of a packet. noauth_nopriv Specify to neither support packet authentication nor encrypting. auth_nopriv Specify to support packet authentication. auth_priv Specify to support packet authentication and encrypting. read_view Specify the view name between 1 and 32 characters.
Page 851: Create Snmp
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands  Parameters <groupname 32> Specify the name of the group that will be deleted.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To remove an SNMP group: Zxxx0:admin#delete snmp group MANAGER_group Command: delete snmp group MANAGER_group Success.
Page 852: Delete Snmp
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands <auth_string 32> Specify the authentication string. If v1 or v2 is specified, the auth_string presents the community string, and it must be one of the entries in the community table. If v3 is specified, the auth_string presents the user name, and it must be one of the entries in the user table.
Page 853: Show Snmp Host
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands Zxxx0:admin#delete snmp host 10.48.74.100 Command: delete snmp host 10.48.74.100 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 73.18. show snmp host  Description This command is used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.  Format show snmp host {<ipaddr>} ...
Page 854: Show Snmp V6Host
73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.19. show snmp v6host  Description This command is used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.  Format show snmp v6host {<ipv6addr>}  Parameters <ipv6addr> (Optional) Specify the v6host IP address. If no parameter is specified, all SNMP IPv6 hosts will be displayed. ...
Page 855 73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.20. enable community_encryption  Description This command is used to enable the encryption state on the SNMP community string.  Format enable community_encryption  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To enable the encryption state on an SNMP community string: Zxxx0:admin# enable community_encryption Command: enable community_encryption...
Page 856 73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.21. disable community_encryption  Description This command is used to disable the encryption state on the SNMP community string.  Format disable community_encryption  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To disable the encryption state on the SNMP community string: Zxxx0:admin# disable community_encryption Command: disable community_encryption...
Page 857 73. SNMPv1/v2/v3 Commands 73.22. show community_encryption  Description This command is used to display the encryption state on the SNMP community string.  Format show community_encryption  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To show the encryption state on the SNMP community string: Zxxx0:admin# show community_encryption Command: show community_encryption SNMP Community Encryption State : Enabled...
Page 858: Spanning Tree Protocol (Stp) Commands
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands 74.Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands  STP STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) is a function to provide path redundancy while preventing loops in a network established by connecting multiple bridges. Even if one end of a communication route is down, the function can continue communications by detouring the route.
Page 859 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands Figure 74-2 RSTP overview  MSTP MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol) is also a modified STP protocol to communicate data for each VLAN using different routes. This allows for effective use of bandwidth. Consolidating multiple VLANS into a group called instance can reduce more CPU loads compared to when designing a spanning tree instance for each VLAN.
Page 860: Show Stp
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands Figure 74-3 MSTP overview show stp show stp instance {<value 0-64>} show stp ports {<portlist>} show stp mst_config_id create stp instance_id <value 1-64> delete stp instance_id <value 1-64> config stp instance_id <value 1-64> [add_vlan | remove_vlan] <vidlist> config stp mst_config_id {revision_level <int 0-65535>...
Page 861: Show Stp Instance
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands Zxxx0:admin#show stp Command: show stp STP Bridge Global Settings ----------------------------- STP Status : Enabled STP Version : MSTP Max Age : 20 Forward Delay : 15 Max Hops : 20 TX Hold Count Forwarding BPDU : Enabled NNI BPDU Address : dot1d...
Page 862: Show Stp Ports
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands Zxxx0:admin#show stp instance Command: show stp instance STP Instance Settings --------------------------- Instance Type : CIST Instance Status : Enabled Instance Priority : 32768(Bridge Priority : 32768, SYS ID Ext : 0 ) STP Instance Operational Status -------------------------------- Designated Root Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00 External Root Cost...
Page 863 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands Zxxx0:admin#show stp ports Command: show stp ports MSTP Port Information Port Index Hello Time : 2 /2 , Port STP : enabled External PathCost : Auto/200000 Edge Port : No /No , : False/No Port RestrictedRole : False, Port RestrictedTCN : False Port Forward BPDU : Enabled...
Page 864 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands Zxxx0:admin#show stp mst_config_id Command: show stp mst_config_id Current MST Configuration Identification ---------------------------------------- Configuration Name : 00-22-22-22-22-00 Revision Level :0 MSTI ID Vid list ------- ----------- CIST 1-4094 Zxxx0:admin# 74.5. create stp instance_id  Description This command is used to create a new MST instance independent from the default Instance: CIST (Instance 0).
Page 865 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands 74.6. delete stp instance_id  Description This command is used to delete the specified MST Instance. CIST (Instance 0) cannot be deleted and you can only delete one instance at a time.  Format delete stp instance_id <value 1-64>...
Page 866 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands  Parameters <value 1-64> Specify the MSTP instance ID. Instance 0 represents a default instance CIST. The DUT supports 65 instances (0-64) at most. add_vlanDefined action type to configure an MST instance. remove_vlan Defined action type to configure an MST instance. <vidlist>...
Page 867: Enable Stp
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands  Parameters revision_level Specify the revision level. <int 0-65535> Specify the revision level. name Specify the name given for a specified MST region. <string> Specify the name given for a specified MST region.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Page 868: Disable Stp
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands Zxxx0:admin#enable stp Command: enable stp Success. Zxxx0:admin# 74.10. disable stp  Description This command is used to disable STP functionality in every existing instance.  Format disable stp  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 869: Config Stp Version
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands 74.11. config stp version  Description This command is used to enable STP globally. If the version is configured as STP or RSTP, all currently running MSTIs should be disabled. If the version is configured as MSTP, the current chip design is enabled for all available MSTIs (assuming that CIST is enabled).
Page 870: Config Stp Priority
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands 74.12. config stp priority  Description One of the parameters used to select the Root Bridge.  Format config stp priority <value 0-61440> instance_id <value 0-64>  Parameters <value 0-61440> Specify the bridge priority value, which must be divisible by 4096. The default value is 32768.
Page 871 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands  Parameters maxage Specify to determine if a BPDU is valid. <value 6-40> Specify to determine if a BPDU is valid. The default value is 20. maxhopsSpecify to restrict the forwarded times of one BPDU. <value 6-40>...
Page 872: Config Stp Ports
74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands 74.14. config stp ports  Description This command is used to configure all the parameters of ports, except for Internal Path Cost and Port Priority.  Format config stp ports <portlist> {externalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000> ] | hellotime <value 1-2>...
Page 873 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands restricted_tcn Decide if this port is to propagate a topology change or not. The default value is false. true Specify not to propagate a topology change. false Specify to propagate a topology change. fbpdu Decide if this port will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled.
Page 874 74. Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) commands priority Specify the Port Priority. <value 0-240> Specify a value between 0 and 240.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure STP MST ports: Zxxx0:admin# config stp mst_ports 1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto Command: config stp mst_ports 1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto Success.
Page 875: Ssh Commands
75. SSH Commands 75.SSH Commands SSH (Secure Shell) is a function to prevent spoofing and wiretapping by the authentication function and communication encryption. It allows you to remotely log in to this Switching Hub more safely than general Telnet access. The commands are used to function this Switching Hub as an SSH server to be connected from SSH clients.
Page 876: Config Ssh Algorithm
75. SSH Commands 75.1. config ssh algorithm  Description This command is used to configure the SSH service algorithm.  Format config ssh algorithm [3DES | AES128 | AES192 | AES256 | arcfour | blowfish | cast128 | twofish128 | twofish192 | twofish256 | SHA1 | RSA | DSA] [enable | disable] ...
Page 877: Show Ssh Algorithm
75. SSH Commands 75.2. show ssh algorithm  Description This command is used to display the SSH authentication algorithm.  Format show ssh algorithm  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To show the SSH server algorithms: Zxxx0:admin#show ssh algorithm Command: show ssh algorithm Encryption Algorithm --------------------------...
Page 878: Config Ssh Authmode
75. SSH Commands 75.3. config ssh authmode  Description This command is used to update the user authentication for SSH configuration.  Format config ssh authmode [password | publickey | hostbased] [enable | disable]  Parameters password Specify the user authentication method. publickey Specify the user authentication method.
Page 879: Config Ssh User
75. SSH Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the SSH user authentication method: Zxxx0:admin#show ssh authmode Command: show ssh authmode The SSH Authentication Method: Password : Enabled Public Key : Enabled Host-based : Enabled Zxxx0:admin# 75.5.
Page 880 75. SSH Commands hostbased Specify the user authentication method. hostname Specify the host domain name. <domain_name 32> Specify the host domain name. The hostname value can be up to 32 characters long. hostname_IP Specify the host domain name and IP address. <domain_name 32>...
Page 881: Config Ssh Server
75. SSH Commands 75.6. show ssh user authmode  Description This command is used to display SSH user information.  Format show ssh user authmode  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To show user information about SSH configuration: Zxxx0:admin# show ssh user authmode Command: show ssh user authmode Current Accounts...
Page 882 75. SSH Commands  Parameters maxsession Specify the SSH server maximum session at the same time. <int 1-8> Specify the SSH server maximum session at the same time. The maximum session value must be between 1 and 8. The default value is 8. contimeout Specify the SSH server connection timeout.
Page 883: Enable Ssh
75. SSH Commands 75.8. enable ssh  Description This command is used to enable SSH server services.  Format enable ssh  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable SSH: Zxxx0:admin#enable ssh Command: enable ssh Success.
Page 884: Show Ssh Server
75. SSH Commands  Example To disable SSH: Zxxx0:admin#disable ssh Command: disable ssh Success. Zxxx0:admin# 75.10. show ssh server  Description This command is used to display SSH server general information.  Format show ssh server  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.
Page 885: Stacking Commands
Stacked devices are interconnected through stacking ports (port 27 and 28). Chain or ring type connection is available.It can also will stack- ing ZEQUO 6400 and ZEQUO 6500. Figure 76-1 Chain or ring type stacking Switches in a stack are divided into three roles: a Master box which controls the stack- ing, a Backup-Master box which operates in place of a failed Master box, and a Slave box which prepares even for a Backup-Master box failure.
Page 886 76. Stacking Commands Figure 76-2 Stacking configuration config stacking_mode [disable | enable] config stacking force_master_role state [enable | disable] show stacking_mode show stack_information show stack_device config box_id current_box_id <value 1-4> new_box_id [auto | <value 1-4>] config box_priority current_box_id <value 1-4> priority <value 1-63> config my_box_id [auto | <value 1-4>] config my_box_priority <value 1-63>...
Page 887 76. Stacking Commands 76.2. config stacking force_master_role state  Description This command is used to configure stacking force master role state. If state is enabled, when device is in election state, it still uses old priority setting and MAC to compare device priority.
Page 888 76. Stacking Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To display stacking mode: Zxxx0:admin# show stacking_mode Command: show stacking_mode Stacking mode : Enabled Zxxx0:admin# 76.4. show stack_information  Description This command displays stacking information. ...
Page 889 76. Stacking Commands Zxxx0:admin# show stack_information Command: show stack_information Stack topology status: New device is detected, hot insert may happen after 7 seconds. Topology :Duplex_Chain My Box ID Master ID Box Count Force Master Role: Enable Box User Prio- Prom Runtime Type Exist rity...
Page 890 76. Stacking Commands Zxxx0:admin# show stack_device Command: show stack_device Box ID Box Type H/W Version Serial Number ------- --------------- ------------ ---------------- Zxxx0 Zxxx0 Zxxx0:admin# 76.6. config box_id current_box_id  Description This command configures the box ID. By default, the box ID is automatically assigned by the system based topology election results.
Page 891 76. Stacking Commands 76.7. config box_priority current_box_id  Description This command configures the priority of Switching Hub, which will determines which box becomes master. Lower number means higher priority. New priority will take effect after user reboot  Format config box_priority current_box_id <value 1-4> priority <value 1-63> ...
Page 892 76. Stacking Commands  Parameters <value 1-4> Enter the box ID, manually, here. This value must be between 1 and 4. auto Specify that the box ID will be assigned automatically.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 893 76. Stacking Commands  Example To configure the box priority to 2: Zxxx0:admin# config my_box_priority 1 Command: config my_box_priority 1 Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 894: Static Mac-Based Vlan Commands
77. Static MAC-based VLAN Commands 77.Static MAC-based VLAN Commands MAC-based VLAN is used to determine a VLAN to which a port belongs based on the source MAC address. Figure 77-1 Static MAC-based Subnet VLAN overview MAC-based VLAN and subnet VLAN can be used simultaneously. When using them simultaneously, you can configure which MAC-based VLAN or subnet VLAN function is prioritized.
Page 895 77. Static MAC-based VLAN Commands vlan Specify the VLAN to be associated with the MAC address. The name must be an existing static VLAN name. <vlan_name 32> Specify the VLAN name. The maximum length is 32 characters. vlanid Specify the VLAN ID to be associated with the MAC address. The ID must be an existing static VLAN ID.
Page 896 77. Static MAC-based VLAN Commands If the MAC address and VLAN are not specified, all static entries associated with the port will be removed.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete a static MAC-based VLAN entry: Zxxx0:admin#delete mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default Command: delete mac_based_vlan mac mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan default Success.
Page 897 77. Static MAC-based VLAN Commands  Example In the following example, MAC address "00-80-c2-33-c3-45" is assigned to VLAN 300 by manual configuration. It is assigned to VLAN 400 by MAC-AC. Since MAC AC has higher priority than manual configuration, the manually configured entry will become inactive.
Page 898: Subnet Vlan Commands
78. Subnet VLAN Commands 78.Subnet VLAN Commands Subnet VLAN is used to determine a VLAN to which a port belongs based on the source IP address. Specify the IP address range with the subnet and map it with a VLAN. This is available for both IPv4 and IPv6.
Page 899 78. Subnet VLAN Commands 78.1. create subnet_vlan  Description This command is used to create a subnet VLAN entry. A subnet VLAN entry is an IP subnet-based VLAN classification rule. If an untagged or priority-tagged IP packet is received on a port, its source IP address will be used to match the subnet VLAN entries.
Page 900 78. Subnet VLAN Commands  Example To create a subnet VLAN entry: Zxxx0:admin#create subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 vlan v2 priority 2 Command: create subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 vlan v2 priority 2 Success. Zxxx0:admin# To create an IPv6 subnet VLAN entry: Zxxx0:admin# create subnet_vlan ipv6network fe80:250:baff::0/64 vlan v2 priority 2 Command: create subnet_vlan ipv6network fe80:250:baff::0/64 vlan v2 priority 2 Success.
Page 901 78. Subnet VLAN Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To delete a subnet VLAN entry: Zxxx0:admin#delete subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 Command: delete subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 Success. Zxxx0:admin# To delete all subnet VLAN entries: Zxxx0:admin#delete subnet_vlan all Command: delete subnet_vlan all Success.
Page 902 78. Subnet VLAN Commands If no parameter is specified, all subnet VLAN information will be displayed.  Restrictions None.  Example To display a specified subnet VLAN entry: Zxxx0:admin#show subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 Command: show subnet_vlan network 172.168.1.1/24 IP Address/Subnet Mask VLAN Priority ------------------------...
Page 903 78. Subnet VLAN Commands 78.4. config vlan_precedence ports  Description This command is used to configure vlan classification precedence on each port. You can specify the order of MAC-based VLAN classification and subnet VLAN classification. If a port's VLAN classification is MAC-based precedence, MAC-based VLAN classification will process at first.
Page 904 78. Subnet VLAN Commands 78.5. show vlan_precedence ports  Description This command is used to display the VLAN classification precedence.  Format show vlan_precedence ports {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Specifies the list of ports used for this display.  Restrictions None.
Page 905: Switch Port Commands
79. Switch Port Commands 79.Switch Port Commands Configure the following settings for each port of this Switching Hub.  Port speed, flow control  Auto-negotiation option  Whether the MAC address learning is enabled or disabled  MDI/MDIX settings  Combo port media settings config ports [<portlist>...
Page 906 79. Switch Port Commands speed Set port speed for the specified ports. auto Set port speed to auto negotiation. capability_advertised Specifies that the capability will be advertised. 10_half Set port speed to 10_half. 10_full Set port speed to 10_full. 100_half Set port speed to 100_half.
Page 907 79. Switch Port Commands state Enable or disable the state of the specified port. If the ports are in error-disabled status, configuring their state to enable will recover these ports from a disabled to an enabled state. The default value is enable. enable Enable the specified port(s).
Page 908: Show Ports
79. Switch Port Commands 79.2. show ports  Description This command is used to display the current configurations of a range of ports.  Format show ports {<portlist>} {[description | err_disabled | auto_negotiation | details | media_type]}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. description (Optional) Specify to display the port description.
Page 909 79. Switch Port Commands Zxxx0:admin#show ports 1:1-1:4 Command: show ports 1:1-1:4 Port State/ Settings Connection Address MDIX Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Speed/Duplex/FlowCtrl Learning ------- -------- --------------------- ---------------------- --------- Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled Auto Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled Auto Enabled Auto/Disabled Link Down Enabled Auto Enabled...
Page 910 79. Switch Port Commands Zxxx0:admin# show ports err_disabled Command: show ports err_disabled Port Port Connection Status Reason State ------ -------- --------------------- ---------------- Enabled Err-Disabled Storm control Description: port1. Enabled Err-Disabled Storm control Description: port8. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 911: System Severity Commands
80. System Severity Commands 80.System Severity Commands The commands are used to configure the significance level of events, such as trapping or logging, in trap and log management using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). config system_severity [trap | log | all] [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice | information | debug | <level 0-7>] show system_severity 80.1.
Page 912 80. System Severity Commands  Example To configure severity level control for information level for a trap: Zxxx0:admin#config system_severity trap information Command: config system_severity trap information Success. Zxxx0:admin# 80.2. show system_severity  Description This command is used to show the severity level control for a system. ...
Page 913: Tech Support Commands
81. Tech Support Commands 81.Tech Support Commands Information, such as this Switching Hub's operation status, is output. It is used as reference data for technical support. You can send an output result to a specified TFTP server. show tech_support upload tech_support_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64> 81.1.
Page 914 81. Tech Support Commands Zxxx0:admin#show tech_support Command: show tech_support #----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Zxxx0 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Technical Support Information Firmware: Build 1.0.x.xx #----------------------------------------------------------------------------- ******************** Basic System Information ******************** [SYS 2000-2-29 22:41:48] Boot Time : 29 Feb 2000 17:54:29 RTC Time : 2000/02/29 22:41:48 Boot PROM Version : Build 1.0.x.xx Firmware Version...
Page 915 81. Tech Support Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.  Example To upload technical support information: Zxxx0:admin#upload tech_support_toTFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_suppport.txt Command: upload tech_support_toTFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_suppport.txt Connecting to server....Done. Upload techsupport file....Done. Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 916: Time And Sntp Commands
82. Time and SNTP Commands 82.Time and SNTP Commands The commands are used to set the time for the internal clock of this Switching Hub. The time can be set manually or automatically using SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol). You can also configure the time zone and summer time settings. config sntp {primary <ipaddr>...
Page 917: Show Sntp
82. Time and SNTP Commands Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To configure SNTP: Zxxx0:admin#config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 30 Command: config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 30 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 82.2.
Page 918: Enable Sntp
82. Time and SNTP Commands 82.3. enable sntp  Description This command is used to turn on SNTP support.  Format enable sntp  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable SNTP: Zxxx0:admin#enable sntp Command: enable sntp...
Page 919: Config Time
82. Time and SNTP Commands  Example To disable SNTP: Zxxx0:admin#disable sntp Command: disable sntp Success. Zxxx0:admin# 82.5. config time  Description This command is used to change the time settings.  Format config time <date ddmthyyyy> <time hh:mm:ss>  Parameters <date ddmthyyyy>...
Page 920 82. Time and SNTP Commands 82.6. config time_zone  Description This command is used to change time zone settings.  Format config time_zone {operator [+ | -] | hour <gmt_hour 0-13> | min <minute 0-59>} (3)  Parameters operatorSpecify the operator of the time zone. Positive.
Page 921: Config Dst
82. Time and SNTP Commands 82.7. config dst  Description This command is used to change Daylight Saving Time settings.  Format config dst [disable | repeating {s_week <start_week 1-4,last> | s_day <start_day sun- sat> | s_mth <start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_week <end_week 1-4, last>...
Page 922 82. Time and SNTP Commands offset Specify the number of minutes to add or to subtract during summertime. The range of offsets are 30, 60, 90, and 120. The default value is 60. Specify 30 minutes to add or to subtract during summertime. Specify 60 minutes to add or to subtract during summertime.
Page 923: Show Time
82. Time and SNTP Commands 82.8. show time  Description This command is used to display current time states.  Format show time  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To show time: Zxxx0:admin#show time Command: show time Current Time Source : System Clock Boot Time : 8 Jan 2000...
Page 924: Traffic Segmentation Commands
83. Traffic Segmentation Commands 83.Traffic Segmentation Commands Traffic segmentation is used to configure ports to which each port can forward receive data. It is used for more detailed traffic restrictions in a VLAN. config traffic_segmentation [<portlist> | all] forward_list [null | all | <portlist>] show traffic_segmentation {<portlist>} 83.1.
Page 925 83. Traffic Segmentation Commands 83.2. show traffic_segmentation  Description This command is used to display the traffic segmentation table.  Format show traffic_segmentation {<portlist>}  Parameters <portlist>(Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current traffic segmentation tables.
Page 926: Utility Commands
84. Utility Commands 84.Utility Commands This chapter describes the following utility commands.  Downloading and uploading firmware, configuration files, and log files using TFTP or RCP server  Selecting firmware and configuration files used during a boot  RCP server settings ...
Page 927 84. Utility Commands show rcp server ping [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipaddr>} ping6 <ipv6addr> {times <value 1-255> | size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipv6addr>} traceroute [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-65535>...
Page 928 84. Utility Commands dest_file (Optional) Specify an absolute path name on the device file system. If path name is not specified, it overwrites the bootup image on the Switch. <pathname> Specify an absolute path name on the device file system. boot_up (Optional) Specify as boot up file.
Page 929 84. Utility Commands 84.2. download cfg_fromRCP  Description This command is used to download a configuration file from a Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) server.  Format download cfg_fromRCP [{username <username>} {<ipaddr>} src_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string 128>] {[unit <unit_id 1-4> | all]} {dest_file <pathname>} ...
Page 930 84. Utility Commands  Example To download a configuration file from an RCP server: Zxxx0:admin#download cfg_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file /home/ runtime.cfg Command: download cfg_fromRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.106 src_file /home/ runtime.cfg Connecting to server....Done. Download configuration....Done. Zxxx0:admin# 84.3. download firmware_fromRCP ...
Page 931 84. Utility Commands rcp: Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename. Example for full path: user_name@10.1.1.1/home/user_name/desxxxx.rom; Example for relative path: user_name@10.1.1.1./desxxxx.rom; Example for omitted user name in RCP string: 10.1.1.1./desxxxx.rom. Note: No spaces are allowed in the <string>. <string 128> Syntax: rcp: username@ipaddr/directory/filename. 　 Example for full path: user_name@10.1.1.1/home/user_name/desxxxx.rom;...
Page 932 84. Utility Commands 84.4. upload  Description This command is used to upload a firmware or a configuration file from device to TFTP server.  Format upload [cfg_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | <domain_name 255>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id 1-4>} {src_file <pathname>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80>...
Page 933 84. Utility Commands begin (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output. <filter_string 80> Specify a filter string enclosed by the quotation mark symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot contain the quotation mark character. The filter string is case sensitive. <filter_string 80>...
Page 934 84. Utility Commands unit (Optional) Specifies which unit on the stacking system. If it is not specified, it refers to the master unit. <unit_id 1-4> Enter the unit ID used here. src_file (Optional) Specify an absolute path name on the device file system. If the path name is not specified, it refers to the boot up image.
Page 935 84. Utility Commands Zxxx0:admin# upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file c:\alert.txt Command: upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.48.74.121 dest_file c:\alert.txt Connecting to server....Done. Upload attack log...... Done. Success. Zxxx0:admin# 84.5. upload attack_log_toRCP  Description This command is used to upload the attack log file from the device to an RCP server. If a user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system.
Page 936 84. Utility Commands  Example To upload the attack log from the device to an RCP server: Zxxx0:admin# upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file / home/Zxxx0.log unit 2 Command: upload attack_log_toRCP username rcp_user 172.18.212.104 dest_file /home/ Zxxx0.log unit 2 Connecting to server..Done. Upload Attack log.....
Page 937 84. Utility Commands unit (Optional) Specifies which unit on the stacking system. If it is not specified, it refers to the master unit. <unit_id 1-4> Enter the unit ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4. src_file (Optional) Specify the path name of the source file.
Page 938 84. Utility Commands  Parameters username(Optional) Specify the remote user name on the RCP server. <username> Specify the remote user name on the RCP server. <ipaddr>(Optional) Specify the IP address of the RCP server. dest_file Specify the path name on the RCP server. Note: If a user specifies the relative file path, the path search strategy will depend on the server system.
Page 939 84. Utility Commands 84.8. upload log_toRCP  Description This command is used to upload a log file from the device to a Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) server.  Format upload log_toRCP [{username <username>} {<ipaddr>} dest_file <path_filename 64> | rcp: <string 128>] ...
Page 940: Config Firmware Image
84. Utility Commands Zxxx0:admin#upload log_toRCP rcp: tld2@172.18.212.104/home/Zxxx0.log Command: upload log_toRCP rcp: tld2@172.18.212.104/home/Zxxx0.log Connecting to server....Done. Upload log......Done. Success. Zxxx0:admin# 84.9. config firmware image  Description This command is used to configure firmware as a boot-up image.  Format config firmware image {unit <unit_id 1-4>} <pathname>...
Page 941: Config Configuration
84. Utility Commands 84.10. config configuration  Description This command is used to select a configuration file as the next boot up configuration or to apply a specific configuration to the system.  Format config configuration {unit <unit_id 1-4>} <pathname> [boot_up | active] ...
Page 942: Show Config
84. Utility Commands 84.11. show config  Description This command is used to display configuration information. The output stream of the configuration data can be filtered by the expression specified at the end of the command. The expression can contain up to three multiple filter evaluations. A filter evaluation begins with a filter type (include, exclude, and begin), followed by up to three filter strings (ex: "stp").
Page 943 84. Utility Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To display configuration information: Zxxx0:admin#show config current_config Command: show config current_config #----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Zxxx0 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Configuration Firmware: Build 1.0.x.xx #----------------------------------------------------------------------------- # STACK config stacking force_master_role state disable # DEVICE config temperature threshold high 79 config temperature threshold low 11...
Page 944 84. Utility Commands  Example To display the configuration file and firmware image assigned as a boot up file: Zxxx0:admin#show boot_file Command: show boot_file Bootup Firmware : c:/runtime.rom Bootup Configuration : c:/config.cfg Zxxx0:admin# 84.13. config rcp server  Description This command is used to configure Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) global server information.
Page 945 84. Utility Commands Zxxx0:admin#config rcp server username travel Command: config rcp server username travel Success. Zxxx0:admin# 84.14. config rcp server clear  Description This command is used to clear Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) global server information.  Format config rcp server clear [ipaddr | username | both] ...
Page 946 84. Utility Commands 84.15. show rcp server  Description This command is used to display Remote Copy Protocol (RCP) global server information.  Format show rcp server  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.  Example To display RCP global server information: Zxxx0:admin#show rcp server Command: show rcp server...
Page 947 84. Utility Commands <domain_name 255> Specifies the domain name of the host. This name can be up to 255 characters long. times (Optional) Specify the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. <value 1-255> Specify the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will send an infinite ICMP echo messages.
Page 948 84. Utility Commands  Parameters <ipv6addr> Specify the IPv6 address of the host. times (Optional) Specify the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. <value 1-255> Specify the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will send an infinite ICMP echo messages.
Page 949 84. Utility Commands 84.18. traceroute  Description This command is used to trace a route between the Switching Hub and a given host on the network.  Format traceroute [<ipaddr> | <domain_name 255>] {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000- 64900>...
Page 950 84. Utility Commands Zxxx0:admin#traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3 Command: traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3 <10 ms 10.12.73.254 <10 ms 10.12.73.254 <10 ms 10.12.73.254 <10 ms 10.19.68.1 <10 ms 10.19.68.1 <10 ms 10.19.68.1 <10 ms 10.48.74.121 Trace complete. Zxxx0:admin# 84.19. traceroute6  Description This command is used to trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switch and a destination end station.
Page 951 84. Utility Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example Trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switching Hub and 3000::1: Zxxx0:admin# traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3 Command: traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3 <10 ms. 1345:142::11 <10 ms.
Page 952 84. Utility Commands tcp_port (Optional) Specify the Telnet server port number to be connected to. If not specified, the default port is 23. <value 1-65535> Enter a value between 1 and 65535.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 953 84. Utility Commands Zxxx0:admin# enable broadcast_ping_reply Command: enable broadcast_ping_reply Success. Zxxx0:admin# 84.22. disable broadcast_ping_reply  Description The disable broadcast_ping_reply command used to disable broadcast ping reply state, device won't reply broadcast ping request.  Format disable broadcast_ping_reply  Parameters None. ...
Page 954 84. Utility Commands 84.23. show broadcast_ping_reply  Description The show broadcast_ping_reply command is used to show the broadcast ping reply state.  Format show broadcast_ping_reply  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To show broadcast ping reply state: Zxxx0:admin# show broadcast_ping_reply Command: show broadcast_ping_reply Broadcast Ping Reply State: Enabled...
Page 955: Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (Vrrp) Command List
85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List 85.Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List VRRP is a function to group multiple routers (VRRP group) and manage routers in a group as one virtual router. It is used to multiplex routers for disaster planning.
Page 956: Enable Vrrp
85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List enable vrrp {ping} disable vrrp {ping} create vrrp vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12> ipaddress <ipaddr> {state [enable | disable] | priority <int 1-254> | advertisement_interval <int 1-255> | preempt [true | false] | critical_ip <ipaddr>...
Page 957: Disable Vrrp
85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List 85.2. disable vrrp  Description This command is used to disable VRRP globally.  Format disable vrrp {ping}  Parameters ping (Optional) Specifies that the ping option will be disabled.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Page 958 85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List ipif Specifies the IP interface used for this configuration. <ipif_name 12> Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters long. ipaddress Specifies the virtual router's IP address used. <ipaddr>...
Page 959 85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List Zxxx0:admin# create vrrp vrid 1 ipif System ipaddress 10.90.90.91 state enable Command: create vrrp vrid 1 ipif System ipaddress 10.90.90.91 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# 85.4. config vrrp vrid  Description This command is used to configure the virtual router settings by VRID. ...
Page 960 85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List preempt (Optional) Controls whether a higher priority virtual router will preempt a lower priority master. The preempt setting must be consistent with all the routers participating within the same VRRP group. Default is settings is true. true Specifies that if the backup router's priority is set higher than the masters priority, it will become the master instead of the current one.
Page 961 85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List 85.5. config vrrp ipif  Description This command is used to configure a virtual router authentication type on an interface.  Format config vrrp ipif <ipif_name 12> [authtype [none | simple authdata <string 8> | ip authdata <string 16>]] ...
Page 962 85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List...
Page 963: Show Vrrp
85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List 85.6. delete vrrp  Description This command is used to delete the VRRP settings.  Format delete vrrp {vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12>}  Parameters vrid (Optional) Specifies the Virtual Router ID used. <vrid 1-255>...
Page 964 85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List  Parameters ipif (Optional) Specifies the IP interface name to be displayed. <ipif_name 12> Enter the IP interface name to be displayed here. This name can be up to 12 characters long. vrid (Optional) Specifies the Virtual Router ID to be displayed.
Page 965 85. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List  Format config vrrp trap state [enable|disable]  Parameters enable Specifies that the VRRP trap will be enabled. disable Specifies that the VRRP trap will be disabled.  Restrictions None.  Example To enable the VRRP trap: Zxxx0:admin# config vrrp trap state enable Command: config vrrp trap state enable...
Page 966: Voice Vlan Commands
86. Voice VLAN Commands 86.Voice VLAN Commands Voice VLAN is a function to configure a voice-specific VLAN to secure the bandwidth of voice data when normal communication data and voice data such as an IP phone coexist on the network. It prevents voice data delay and maintains the quality at the constant level regardless of the traffic status on the network.
Page 967 86. Voice VLAN Commands 86.1. enable voice_vlan  Description This command is used to enable the global voice VLAN function on a Switching Hub. To enable the voice VLAN, the voice VLAN must be also assigned. At the same time, the VLAN must be an existing static 802.1Q VLAN.
Page 968 86. Voice VLAN Commands 86.2. disable voice_vlan  Description This command is used to disable the voice VLAN function on a Switching Hub. When the voice VLAN function is disabled, the voice VLAN will become unassigned.  Format disable voice_vlan ...
Page 969 86. Voice VLAN Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To set the priority of the voice VLAN to be six: Zxxx0:admin#config voice_vlan priority 6 Command: config voice_vlan priority 6 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 86.4.
Page 970 86. Voice VLAN Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To add a user-defined OUI of a voice device: Zxxx0:admin#config voice_vlan oui add 00-C0-8F-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Command: config voice_vlan oui add 00-C0-8F-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Success.
Page 971 86. Voice VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#config voice_vlan ports 4-6 state enable Command: config voice_vlan ports 4-6 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin# To set voice VLAN ports 4 to 6 to auto mode: Zxxx0:admin#config voice_vlan ports 4-6 mode auto Command: config voice_vlan ports 4-6 mode auto Success.
Page 972 86. Voice VLAN Commands 86.7. config voice_vlan aging_time  Description This command is used to set the aging time of the voice VLAN. The aging time is used to remove a port from voice VLAN if the port is an automatic VLAN member. When the last voice device stops sending traffic and the MAC address of this voice device is aged out, the voice VLAN aging timer will be started.
Page 973 86. Voice VLAN Commands  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display voice VLAN information: Zxxx0:admin#show voice_vlan Command: show voice_vlan Voice VLAN State : Disabled Voice VLAN : Unassigned Priority Aging Time : 720 minutes Log State : Enabled Zxxx0:admin# 86.9.
Page 974 86. Voice VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin# show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device Command: show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device Index Local Port : 1:1 Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address Chassis ID : 00-C0-8F-00-00-11 Port ID Subtype : Network Address Port ID : 00-C0-8F-00-00-00 Create Time : 9/1/2013 08:30 Remain Time : 120 Seconds...
Page 975 86. Voice VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#show voice_vlan oui Command: show voice_vlan oui OUI Address Mask Description ------------------ ----------------- --------------- 00-01-E3-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Siemens 00-03-6B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Cisco 00-09-6E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Avaya 00-0F-E2-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Huawei&3COM 00-60-B9-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 NEC&Phillips 00-D0-1E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Pingtel 00-E0-75-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Veritel 00-E0-BB-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 3COM Total Entries: 8...
Page 976 86. Voice VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#show voice_vlan ports 1-3 Command: show voice_vlan ports 1-3 Ports Status Mode ----- --------- -------- Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Zxxx0:admin# 86.12. show voice_vlan voice_device  Description This command is used to show voice devices that are connected to the ports. The start time is the time when the device is detected on this port and the activate time is the latest time when the device sends the traffic.
Page 977: Vlan Commands
87. VLAN Commands 87.VLAN Commands VLAN (Virtual LAN) is a function to divide ports of this Switching Hub into groups and create multiple virtual LAN environments. As one VLAN corresponds to the broadcast domain, this function allows to improve security by restraining communications between VLANs, as well as reducing traffic on the network.
Page 978: Create Vlan
87. VLAN Commands show vlan vlanid <vidlist> show vlan ports {<portlist>} show gvrp config private_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add [isolated | community] | remove] [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] show private_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]} 87.1. create vlan ...
Page 979: Create Vlan Vlanid
87. VLAN Commands To create a private VLAN with the name "v3" and VLAN ID 3: Zxxx0:admin#create vlan v3 tag 3 type private_vlan Command: create vlan v3 tag 3 type private_vlan Success. Zxxx0:admin# 87.2. create vlan vlanid  Description This command is used to create a VLAN on the Switching Hub. The VLAN ID must be always specified for creating a VLAN.
Page 980: Delete Vlan
87. VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#create vlan vlanid 3 type private_vlan Command: create vlan vlanid 3 type private_vlan Success. Zxxx0:admin# 87.3. delete vlan  Description This command is used to delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switching Hub.  Format delete vlan <vlan_name 32> ...
Page 981: Config Vlan
87. VLAN Commands  Parameters <vidlist> Specify a range of VLAN ID to be deleted.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To remove a VLAN ID 2: Zxxx0:admin#delete vlan vlanid 2 Command: delete vlan vlanid 2 Success.
Page 982 87. VLAN Commands advertisement Specify to send GVRP out for this VLAN or not. If not, the VLAN cannot be joint dynamically. enable Specify to enable GVRP. disable Specify to disable GVRP.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command. ...
Page 983: Config Vlan Vlanid
87. VLAN Commands 87.6. config vlan vlanid  Description This command is used to add or delete ports to the port list of a previously configured VLAN. Users can specify the additional ports as tagged, untagged, or forbidden.  Format config vlan vlanid <vidlist>...
Page 984 87. VLAN Commands To delete ports 4 through 8 from VLAN 1: Zxxx0:admin#config vlan vlanid 1 delete 4-8 Command: config vlan vlanid 1 delete 4-8 Success. Zxxx0:admin# To enable the VLAN default advertisement: Zxxx0:admin#config vlan vlanid default advertisement enable Command: config vlan vlanid default advertisement enable Success.
Page 985 87. VLAN Commands acceptable_frame Specify the type of frame that will be accepted by the port. tagged_only Only tagged frame will be received. admit_all Both tagged and untagged frames will be accepted. pvid Specify the Port VID (PVID) that will be associated with the port. <vlanid 1- 4094>...
Page 986: Config Gvrp
87. VLAN Commands  Example To display 802.1q port settings for ports 1 to 3: Zxxx0:admin#show port_vlan 1-3 Command: show port_vlan 1-3 Port PVID GVRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type ------- ---- -------- ---------------- ---------------------------- Disabled Enabled All Frames Disabled Enabled All Frames Disabled...
Page 987: Enable Gvrp
87. VLAN Commands  Example To set the Join time to 200 milliseconds: Zxxx0:admin#config gvrp timer join 200 Command: config gvrp timer join 200 Success. Zxxx0:admin# 87.10. enable gvrp  Description This command is used to enable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP). The default is disabled.
Page 988: Disable Gvrp
87. VLAN Commands 87.11. disable gvrp  Description This command is used to disable Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).  Format disable gvrp  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To disable Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP): Zxxx0:admin#disable gvrp Command: disable gvrp...
Page 989: Show Vlan Vlanid
87. VLAN Commands  Restrictions None.  Example To display VLAN settings: Zxxx0:admin#show vlan Command: show vlan VLAN Trunk State : Disabled VLAN Trunk Member Ports VLAN Name : default VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled Member Ports : 1-28 Static Ports : 1-28 Current Tagged Ports...
Page 990: Show Vlan Ports
87. VLAN Commands  Example To display VLAN settings for VLAN ID 1: Zxxx0:admin#show vlan vlanid 1 Command: show vlan vlanid 1 VLAN Name : default VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled Member Ports : 1-28 Static Ports : 1-28 Current Tagged Ports Current Untagged Ports: 1-28 Static Tagged Ports...
Page 991: Show Gvrp
87. VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#show vlan ports 1-2 Command: show vlan ports 1-2 Port Untagged Tagged Dynamic Forbidden ------ ----- -------- ------ ------- --------- Zxxx0:admin# 87.15. show gvrp  Description This command is used to display the GVRP status for the Switching Hub. ...
Page 992 87. VLAN Commands 87.16. config private_vlan  Description A private VLAN is comprised of a primary VLAN, up to one isolated VLAN, and a number of community VLANs. A private VLAN ID is presented by the VLAN ID of the primary VLAN. The command used to associate or de-associate a secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN.
Page 993 87. VLAN Commands  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To associate secondary VLAN to private VLAN p1: Zxxx0:admin#config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 2-5 Command: config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 2-5 Success.
Page 994 87. VLAN Commands Zxxx0:admin#show private_vlan Command: show private_vlan Private VLAN 100 ------------------ Promiscuous Ports: 1 Trunk Ports Isolated Ports : 3-5 Isolated VLAN : 20 Community Ports : 6-8 Community VLAN: 30 Community Ports : 9-10 Community VLAN: 40 Private VLAN 200 ------------------ Promiscuous Ports: 11 Trunk Ports...
Page 995: Vlan Trunking Commands
88. VLAN Trunking Commands 88.VLAN Trunking Commands To establish a VLAN that spans multiple Switching Hubs, you need to enable VLAN Trunking on ports connecting the Switching Hubs. In a trunking port, packets with a VLAN tag added are transferred from Switching Hub to Switching Hub and sent to the VLAN specified by the tag information on the destination Switching Hub.
Page 996 88. VLAN Trunking Commands  Format enable vlan_trunk  Parameters None.  Restrictions Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.  Example To enable VLAN trunking: Zxxx0:admin#enable vlan_trunk Command: enable vlan_trunk Success Zxxx0:admin# 88.2. disable vlan_trunk ...
Page 997 88. VLAN Trunking Commands Zxxx0:admin#disable vlan_trunk Command: disable vlan_trunk Success. Zxxx0:admin# 88.3. config vlan_trunk ports  Description This command is used to configure a port as a VLAN trunking port. By default, none of the ports is a VLAN trunking port. A VLAN trunking port and a non-VLAN trunking port cannot be grouped as an aggregated link.
Page 998 88. VLAN Trunking Commands Zxxx0:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 1-5 state enable Command: config vlan_trunk ports 1-5 state enable Success. Zxxx0:admin#...
Page 999 88. VLAN Trunking Commands 88.4. show vlan_trunk  Description This command is used to display VLAN trunking information.  Format show vlan_trunk  Parameters None.  Restrictions None.  Example To display the current VLAN trunking information: Zxxx0:admin#show vlan_trunk Command: show vlan_trunk VLAN Trunk Global Setting ---------------------------- VLAN Trunk Status...
Page 1000: Web-Based Access Control (Wac) Commands
89. Web-based Access Control (WAC) Commands 89.Web-based Access Control (WAC) Commands WAC (Web-based Access Control, Web-based authentication) is a terminal authentication method using a PC web browser. It uses the HTTP or HTTPS protocol to perform an authentication process through a local database in this Switching Hub or an external RADIUS server as the authentication server.

Panasonic ZEQUO 6400 Operating Instructions Manual

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

20.Debug Software Command List

Quick Links

Chapters

Related Manuals for Panasonic ZEQUO 6400

Summary of Contents for Panasonic ZEQUO 6400